Samsung SDR-3102, SDR-4102, SDR-5102, SDS-P4042 Quick Start Manual

Quick Start Guide

KIT MODEL

SDS-P3042 / V3042/ S3042/ P3022/ P4042 / V4042/

S4042/ P4082/ P5082 / S5082 / P5102 / P5122

DVR MODEL

SDR-3102 / 4102 / 5102

SAMSUNG ALL-IN-ONE SECURITY SYSTEM

Thank you for purchasing a Samsung DVR Security System.

Follow the simple steps in this guide to set up and start using your new system.

If you have any questions or need help installing your new product please contact our free technical support.

Telephone: 1-877-349-3149

9am - 9pm EST, Monday - Friday

Internet: http://www.samsungsv.com

INSTALLING YOUR SYSTEM

M  Images may differ depending on the model.

❒

4CH DVR

Front

1

POWER REC NETWORK

Rear

3

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

AUDIO IN IN4

AUDIO OUT

VGA

HDMI

LAN eSA

TA

USB

RS485

DC12V

4

5

2

1 Connect a mouse

2 Connect a camera

3 Connect a monitor

4 Connect the DC adaptors

5 Connect to a network router

English

_1

❒

8CH DVR

Rear

3

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

AUDIO IN

IN4

AUDIO OUT

VGA

HDMI

LAN

USB

RS485

DC12V

4

5

2

16CH DVR

Rear

3

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

VGA

AUDIO OUT

HDMI eSA

TA

RS485

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

2

❒

Connecting the DVR to Live monitoring

Front

POWER REC NETWORK

4

5

2_

English

1

Connect a mouse

Rear

2

Connect an BNC camera

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

VIDEO IN

CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 eSATA

LAN

IN1 IN2

VGA

IN3

AUDIO IN

IN4

AUDIO OUT

HDMI RS485 USB DC 12 V

4 Connect a monitor

5 Connect the DC adaptors (DVR)

6 Connect to a network router

English

_3

VIEW THE LAUNCHER MENU

The Launcher menu appears on the bottom of the live screen.

1. In Live mode, right-click to display the context menu and select

< Show Launcher >.

2013-01-01

01:10:25

2013-01-01

01:10:25

2. Move the cursor to the bottom and click a desired item in the

Launcher menu.

1

M 

If no input is entered for 10 seconds, the menu will disappear.

 The Launcher menu can be accessed only by using the mouse.



Screen mode may vary depending on the DVR supported channel.

1 Date/Time

2 Screen Mode

3 Menu Expansion Button

4 Audio

5 Zoom

6 PTZ

7 Alarm

8 Freeze

SYSTEM SETTING

❒

Time Setting

1. Right click on the mouse and select main menu.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 90

9 Play

0 Record

2. In the login window, enter the password and click < OK >.

J The initial administrator ID is “ admin ” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.

Set password for your wireless network if you use the product with a wireless router. Being not protected with password or using the default wireless router password may expose your video data to potential threat.

Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the information theft.

Please, take note that it’s a user’s responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password.

3. Click on Date/Time/Language. Set time and date.

4_

English

4. After filling in the information, Click < OK >.

Network Setting

❒

Connection Mode

1. Click on Network and select < Connection Mode >.

If there occur a problem with Connection Mode, check the connection as “ Installing your system ” on page 1.

If you still have a problem, contact the nearest service center for more information.

2. Under < Interface > Tab.

Check < IP Type > is set to < DHCP > as default.

If it connected successfully, you can see the success comment

J If you know Static IP information from your router, please select

< Static IP > and enter IP address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask etc.

M 

Please refer to the Router Guide in provided CD when you use a static IP.

1

3. Under < Port > Tab.

J Write down < Device Port > and < HTTP Port >.

1 IP Address

2 Device Port 3 HTTP Port

4. When completing the setting, click < OK >.

2

3

English

_5

❒

SETTING UP SAMSUNG iPOLiS DDNS

Since you will be accessing the DVR remotely, let’s setup your Samsung iPolis account first using the PC.

Go to Your PC

1. Open your browser and go to http://www.samsungipolis.com and click

< LOGIN >.

2. You first need to create an account.

Click < SIGN UP >.

3. Follow-the account registration instructions on the website.

4. After completing the account registration, login to your account.

J

Write down your User ID and Password below.

1 ID 2 Password

5. Add your DVR to your account. Click < PRODUCT REGISTRATION >.

1

2

6. Create a name (Product ID) for your DVR. Use 4 to 20 alphanumeric characters without spaces. Select classification, model number of the

DVR and click < REGISTRATION >.

J

Model Number

4CH DVR : SDR-3102 (SDS-P3042,SDS-P3022, SDS-V3042,

SDS-S3042)

8CH DVR : SDR-4102 (SDS-P4042, SDS-P4082, SDS-V4042,

SDS-S4042)

16CH DVR : SDR-5102 (SDS-P5082, SDS-P5102, SDS-P5122,

SDS-S5082)

7. After registration, you should see your product in the list.

J

Write down the product ID below.

sdr-5102

3 sdr-5102HOME sdr-5102

3

Product ID

8. Click < LOGOUT > to close the Web Page.

sdr-5102HOME

6_

English

Go back to DVR

1. From network tab, click on < DDNS >.

2. Under DDNS Site, select < iPOLiS >.

3. Under Product ID, enter the product ID you created on the Samsung iPOLiS website.

Under Quick Connect, select < Use > and click < OK >.

J

Write down the DDNS Host address:.

1 DDNS Host Address

1

If the connection was not successful, your router may not be supporting UPNP.

For more information on enabling UPNP on your router, please see

User manual.

English

_7

REMOTE MONITORING

From a Windows computer

1. Open Windows Internet Explorer and go to http://www.samsungipolis.

com and click < LOGIN >.

2. Login with the user ID and password you wrote down earlier.

3. Click < >.

4. You will be asked to install the active X plug-in.

sdr-5102HOME sdr-5102

5. Enter the user ID and password for the DVR.

J If the screen to the bottom right does not appear, check if the DVR set is connected properly with a valid IP address.

6. Now, you can install the cameras and place the cameras where they are needed.

8_

English

USING A SMARTPHONE

❒

For Android Phone

1

Visit Play Store to Download the

Samsung iPOLiS mobile app.

SDR-5102 www.samsungipolis.com/sdr-5102

80

4524 admin

SDR-3100

2

Search for Samsung iPOLiS.

3 Launch the iPOLiS mobile app add the

DVR.

Tap on the menu icon and tap < Add

Device >.

4

Register the DVR to the iPOLiS mobile.

J Name : Create a name for the DVR you are adding

Model : Select the DVR

Host : If you are using Samsung iPOLiS DDNS, enter the DDNS Host Address you wrote down earlier. (Page 6, 7)

It should be www.samsungipolis.com/Product ID

HTTP Port : Enter the HTTP Port you wrote down earlier.

RTSP Port : Enter the last port number of Device Port you wrote down earlier.

ID : Default ID is < admin >. If you change before, please enter changed ID.

Password : If you changed before, please enter changed Password.

Camera : Select the cameras you want to view.

J

The initial administrator ID is “ admin ” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.




English

_9

❒

For iPhone

1

Visit App Store to Download the

Samsung iPOLiS mobile app.

SAMSUNG TECHWIN C...

Utilities

Install

2 Search for Samsung iPOLiS.

3 Launch the iPOLiS mobile app add the

DVR.

At the Add Device pop-up, tap < OK >.

4 Register the DVR to the iPOLiS mobile.

M 

For more information of each item, refer to “ For Android Phone ”.

SDR-5102

DVR www.samsungipolis.com/s...

80

4524

RECORDING AND PLAYBACK

1. Press the [ MENU ] button on the remote control.

Use the left/right button (◄►) to select < Record >.

Use the up/down buttons (▲▼) to move to < Recording Schedule >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

2. Set each of the Record Schedule options.

To change the setting, set the channel then select the time and date you want to record and click < OK >.

The default is as shown.

Color

White

Orange

Blue

Green

Part Names

No Recording

Continuous

Event

Both(Cont&Evnt)

Functions

No schedule / event recording

Scheduled recording only

Event recording only

Both scheduled / event recordings

10_

English

To change the record quality & resolution, select < REC Quality &

Resolution >.

System Possible FPS

NTSC

PAL

Record Size

CIF 352 × 240

2CIF 704 × 240

4CIF 704 × 480

WD1: 960 x 480

CIF 352 × 288

2CIF 704 × 288

4CIF 704 × 576

WD1: 960 x 576

OFF, 1~30

OFF, 1~25

3. In Live mode, click < Search > in the right-click menu.

Select < Time Search > in the < Search > menu.

Select a desired date in the calendar, and a desired timeline in the Time bar, and press the < Play > button if you want to watch the recorded video.

J

The colored line indicates types of the recording data.

If you want to play a time specific data, enter an exact time.

4. If you have set the event recording, you can play a desired scene using the < Event Search > function. In Live mode, click < Search > in the rightclick menu. Select < Event Search > in the < Search > Menu.

Set a desired date in the calendar and the result will be listed on the table. Select one you wish to view and press the < Play > button.

5. You can change the play speed or channel, or stop the playback using the onscreen button bar.

English

_11

12_

English

4/8/16 CHANNEL DVR

SDS-P3042/V3042/S3042/P3022/P4042/V4042/

User Manual

S4042/P4082/P5082/S5082/P5102/P5122

4/8/16 Channel DVR

User Manual

Copyright

©2013 Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Trademark

is the registered logo of Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd.

The name of this product is the registered trademark of Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd.

Other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the registered trademark of their respective company.

Restriction

Samsung Techwin Co., Ltd shall reserve the copyright of this document. Under no circumstances, this document shall be reproduced, distributed or changed, partially or wholly, without formal authorization of Samsung Techwin.

Disclaimer

Samsung Techwin makes the best to verify the integrity and correctness of the contents in this document, but no formal guarantee shall be provided. Use of this document and the subsequent results shall be entirely on the user's own responsibility. Samsung Techwin reserves the right to change the contents of this document without prior notice.

Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

The initial administrator ID is “admin” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time.


Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the information


overview

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Read these operating instructions carefully before using the unit.

Follow all the safety instructions listed below.

Keep these operating instructions handy for future reference.

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings, Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus

(including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding- type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

English _3

overview

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) NO USER

SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

This symbol indicates that dangerous voltage consisting a risk of electric shock is present within this unit.

This exclamation point symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING

1 To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

1 To prevent injury, this apparatus must be securely attached to the floor/wall in accordance with the installation instructions.

WARNING

1. Be sure to use only the standard adapter that is specified in the specification sheet.

Using any other adapter could cause fire, electrical shock, or damage to the product.

2. Incorrectly connecting the power supply or replacing battery may cause explosion, fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.

3. Securely plug the power cord into the power receptacle. Insecure connection may cause fire.

4. When installing the camera, fasten it securely and firmly. The fall of camera may cause personal injury.

5. Do not place conductive objects (e.g. screwdrivers, coins, metal parts, etc.) or containers filled with water on top of the camera. Doing so may cause personal injury due to fire, electric shock, or falling objects.

6. Do not install the unit in humid, dusty, or sooty locations. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.

7. If any unusual smells or smoke come from the unit, stop using the product. In such case, immediately disconnect the power source and contact the service center. Continued use in such a condition may cause fire or electric shock.

8. If this product fails to operate normally, contact the nearest service center. Never disassemble or modify this product in any way. (SAMSUNG is not liable for problems caused by unauthorized modifications or attempted repair.)

9. When cleaning, do not spray water directly onto parts of the product. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.

10. Do not expose the product to the direct airflow from an air conditioner.

Otherwise, it may cause moisture condensation inside the Clear Dome due to temperature difference between internal and external of the dome camera.

11. If you install this product in a low-temp area such as inside a cold store, you must seal up the wiring pipe with silicon, so that the external air can not flow inside the housing.

Otherwise, external high, humid air may flow inside the housing, pooling moisture or vapor inside the product due to a difference between internal and external temperature.

4_ overview

BEFORE START

This user manual provides Information for using the DVR such as brief introduction, part names, functions, connection to other equipment, menu setup, etc.

You have to keep in mind the following notices : o SAMSUNG retains the copyright on this manual.

o This manual cannot be copied without SAMSUNG’s prior written approval.

o We are not liable for any or all losses to the product incurred by your use of non-standard product or violation of instructions mentioned in this manual.

o Prior to opening the case, please consult a qualified technician first. Whenever this is needed power must be removed from the unit.

o Before installing an additional HDD or connecting an external storage device (USB HDD) to this DVR, check the compatibility. Consult your provider for the compatibility list.

Warning

Y

Battery

It is essential that when changing the battery in the unit, the replacement battery must be of the same type otherwise there may be a possibility of an explosion.

The following are the specifications of the battery you are using now.

1 Normal voltage : 3V

1 Normal capacity : 170mAh

1 Continuous standard load : 0.2mA

1 Operating temperature : -20°C ~ +85°C

(-4°F ~ +185°F)

CALIFORNIA USA ONLY

This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide)

Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA.

“Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Caution

1 Connect the power cord into a grounded outlet.

1 The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and shall stay readily operable at any time.

1 Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like

1 Risk of Explosion if Battery is replaced by an Incorrect Type. Dispose of Used Batteries According to the

Instructions.

Y

System Shutdown

Turning off the power while the product is in operation, or undertaking improper actions may cause damage or malfunction to the hard drive or the product.

Please turn off the power, please right-click to display the context sensitive menu and select < Shutdown >.

After selecting < OK > in the pop-up menu, you can pull off the power cord.

You may want to install a UPS system for safe operation in order to prevent damage caused by an unexpected power stoppage. (Any questions concerning UPS, consult your UPS retailer.)

Y

Operating Temperature

The guaranteed operating temperature range of this product is 0°C ~ 40°C (32°F ~ 104°F).

This product may not work properly if you run right after a long period of storage at a temperature below the guaranteed one.

Prior to using a device that has been stored for a long period in low temperatures, allow the product to stand at room temperature for a period.

Especially for the built-in HDD in the product, its guaranteed temperature range is 5°C ~ 55°C (41°F ~ 131°F).

Likewise, the hard drive may not work at a temperature below the guaranteed one.

Y

Ethernet Port

DVR is designed for indoor use only and all the communication wirings are limited to inside of the building.

English _5

overview

CONTENTS

OVERVIEW

3

3 Important Safety Instructions

5 Before

6 Contents

8 Features

10 Part Names and Functions (Front)

11 Part Names and Functions (Rear)

12 Remote

CONNECTING WITH OTHER DEVICE

14

14 installation

14 Checking the Installation Environment

15 Connecting External Devices

15 Connecting the USB

15 Connecting External SATA HDD

16 Connecting the Camera (SDC-7340BC)

18 Connecting the RS-485 Device

18 Connecting the Network

LIVE

20

20 Getting

22 Live Screen Configuration

27 Live

30 Zoom

30 Audio

30 Freeze

31 Event

MAIN MENU

32

32 System

44 Setting the Device

53 Setting the Recording

56 Setting the Event

58 Backup

60 Network

73 Controlling a PTZ Device

6_ overview

SEARCH & PLAY

76

76 Search

79 Playback

WEB VIEWER

81

81 Introducing Web Viewer

82 Connecting Web Viewer (Windows)

84 Using Live Viewer (Windows)

89 Controlling a Connected PTZ Camera

92 Using Search Viewer

95 Viewer

106 About

107 Connecting Web Viewer (Mac)

108 Using Live Viewer (Mac)

110 Mobile Viewer

BACKUP VIEWER

111

111 SEC Backup Viewer

APPENDIX

113

113 Product Specification (Camera)

114 Product Specification(DVR)

120 Product Overview

123 Default Setting

126 Troubleshooting

129 Open Source License Report on the Product

English _7

overview

FEATURES

The DVR employs H.264 video encoding for 4, 8 or 16 channel inputs and G.711 audio encoding for 4, 8 or 16 channels while simultaneously supports hard disc recording and playback.

These DVRs also supports network connectivity, providing remote monitoring from a remote PC transferring video and audio data.

1 Provides a convenient User Interface

1 4/8/16 CH Composite Input Connectors

1 Supports WD1/CIF/2CIF/4CIF recording formats

1 With the network specific codec, network transfer enabled regardless of the recording conditions

1 De-interlacing processor for better picture quality

1 Display of HDD information and status by using HDD SMART

1 Hard Disk overwrite function

1 Mass storage hard disk backup through high-speed USB 2.0

1 Simultaneous Record and Playback of 4/8/16-channel video data

1 Various Search Modes (Search by Time, Event, Backup and Motion Detection)

1 Various Recording Modes ( Manual , Event, Scheduled Recording)

1 Alarm Interface

1 Remote Monitoring function by Network Viewer, Smart Viewer and Mobile Viewer

Standards Approvals

M 

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

8_ overview

Package Contents

Please unwrap the product, and place the product on a flat place or in the place to be installed.

Please check the following contents are included in addition to the main unit.

POWER REC NETWORK

DVR (1SET) Adapter * / Power Cable * Mouse (1EA)

Remote Control (1EA) / Battery (2EA) SDC-7340BC * Camera Cable * ( 60FT or 90FT )

Camera Power Cable *

(5 splitter or 9 splitter)

Network Cable(1EA) / HDMI Cable (1EA) Wireless USB Adaptor*/ USB Cable*

Expansion pipe and Screw * Network Viewer Software /User Manual CD (1EA) Quick Start Guide(1EA)

Model

SDS-P3042/V3042/

S3042

SDS-P3022

SDS-P4042/V4042/

S4042

SDC-7340BC

4EA

2EA

4EA

SDS-P4082 8EA

SDS-P5082/S5082

SDS-P5102

SDS-P5122

8EA

10EA

12EA

Adapter/Power cable

Camera Cable

Expansion pipe and Screw

1EA 60FT: 4EA 12EA/12EA

1EA

1EA

1EA

2EA

2EA

2EA

60FT: 2EA

60FT: 4EA

60FT: 6EA,

90FT: 2EA

60FT: 6EA,

90FT: 2EA

60FT: 8EA,

90FT: 2EA

60FT: 9EA,

90FT: 3EA

6EA/6EA

12EA/12EA

24EA/24EA

24EA/24EA

30EA/30EA

36EA/36EA

Camera Power cable

5 splitter 1EA

Wireless USB

Adaptor/USB Cable

-

5 splitter 1EA

-

9 splitter 1EA

-

9 splitter 1EA

-

5 splitter 1EA

9 splitter 1EA

5 splitter 1EA

9 splitter 1EA

5 splitter 1EA

9 splitter 1EA

-

1EA/1EA

-

English _9

overview

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS (FRONT)

POWER REC NETWORK b c

Part Names

USB Port b Remote Control

Receiver c

LED Indicator

Functions

Connects the USB devices.

Input the remote control signal.

POWER : Displays the power ON/OFF status.

REC : Lights on when recording is in progress.

NETWORK : Displays both network connection and data transfer status.

M 

All functions are operable with mouse control, since there are no front buttons.

10_ overview

PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS (REAR)

SDR-5102 b c eSATA

LAN

SDR-4102

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12

VIDEO IN

CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 b

IN1 IN2

VGA

IN3 IN4

AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT

HDMI c

RS485 USB DC 12 V

SDR-3102

Part Names

VIDEO IN b

AUDIO IN c

VGA OUT e-SATA

NETWORK

DC 12V

USB

RS-485

HDMI

AUDIO OUT

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

CH5 CH6

VIDEO IN

CH7 CH8

LAN

VGA

IN1 IN2

IN3

AUDIO IN

IN4

AUDIO OUT b c

HDMI USB

RS485

LAN

CH1 CH2

CH3

VIDEO IN

CH4

VGA

IN1 IN2

IN3

AUDIO IN

IN4

AUDIO OUT

Input port for the composite video signal.

Functions

Input ports (RCA jack) for the audio signal.

Output port for VGA video signal.

Ports used for external storage device connections.

NETWORK connector port.

DVR power input port.

USB connector port.

Used to establish RS-485 communications.

HDMI connector port.

Output port (RCA jack) for the audio signal.

HDMI USB RS485 eSATA

DC 12 V eSATA

DC 12 V

English _11

overview

REMOTE CONTROL

POWER

Displays the Exit pop up screen.

NUMBER [0~+10]

Used as the numeric input keys, or displays a single channel.

PTZ

Displays or ends PTZ.

T/W

Zooms in or out.

SEARCH

Displays the search menu.

MODE

Changes the screen mode.

MENU

Goes to the system menu screen.

PRESET

Displays the Preset Setup.

FREEZE

Freezes the screen temporarily.

ZOOM

Runs the digital zoom (x2) function.

Skip Backward (by unit time),

Slow Rewind, Slow Forward,

Skip Forward (by unit time)

REC

Starts or ends the live recording.

ID

Sets the ID of the system.

Select 2 digits from 0 ~ 9 while pressing the ID Key.

SCROLL

,.

Moves the menu scroll.

VIEW

Runs the View function in the PTZ mode.

BACKUP

Displays the Backup Menu.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.

Up/Down/Left/Right( ▲▼◄ ► )/ENTER

Moves the cursor up/down/left/right, and runs the

Select Menu.

REC LOCK

Selects the recording lock function.

AUDIO

Turns Audio on/off.

ALARM

Cancels the Alarm.

Move Frame

While paused, moves to the previous/next frame.

FR, STOP, PLAY/PAUSE, FF

Using the numeric buttons

CHANNEL 1–9

CHANNEL 10

CHANNEL 11–16

Press each button between 1 to 9. (8CH : 8)

Press the [ 0/+10 ] button first, then press the [ 0/+10 ] within 1 second.

Press the [ 0/+10 ] button first, then press any number between 1 to 6.

12_ overview

Changing the Remote Control ID

1. Press the [ ID ] button of the remote control and check the ID displayed on the DVR screen.

The factory default ID of the remote control is 00.

2. Enter 2 digits of your selection in order, while pressing the system [ ID ] button.

3. When ID input is done, press the system [ ID ] button again to check the setting.

M 

If you want to change the remote control ID to 08: Press 0 and 8 in order while the system [ ID ] button is pressed.

Remote control's ID and DVR’s ID should be matched for proper operation. Refer to “ Remote Devices ”. (Page 50 )

English _13

connecting with other device

INSTALLATION

Please take note of the followings before using this product.

1 Do not use the product outdoor.

1 Do not spill water or liquid in the connection part of the product.

1 Do not impose the system to excessive shock or force.

1 Do not pull out the power plug forcefully.

1 Do not disassemble the product on your own.

1 Do not exceed the rated input/output range.

1 Use a certified power cord only.

1 For the product with an input ground, use a grounded power plug.

CHECKING THE INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT

Samsung Digital Video Recorder (“DVR” hereinafter) is a stateof-art security device, and contains mass storage hard disk(s) and critical circuits inside.

When the temperature rises inside the product, the product may breakdown and the product life be shortened. Please pay attention to the following recommendations before installation.

Temperature

Unit: ºC

One Year: 24HR X 365 DAY =8,760 HR

Life (Unit: HOURS)

The followings are the recommendations when Samsung DVR is installed on a rack.

1. Please ensure that the rack inside is not sealed.

2. Please ensure the air is circulated through the inlet/outlet as shown in the picture.

3. If the DVR or other devices on a rack is to be stacked as in the picture, provide a suitable space or install a ventilating opening for air circulation.

4. For natural air convection, place the inlet at the bottom of the rack and the outlet on top.

5. It is strongly recommended that a fan motor is installed at the inlet and the outlet for air circulation. (Please fit a filter at the inlet to screen dust or foreign substances.)

6. Please maintain the temperature inside the rack or surrounding areas between

0°C ~ 40°C (32°F ~ 104°F) as shown in the figure 1.

[Figure 1]

Rack Mount Instructions - The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the installation instructions :

A) Elevated Operating Ambient - If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature specified by the manufacturer.

B) Reduced Air Flow - Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.

[Figure 2]

C) Mechanical Loading - Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.

D) Circuit Overloading - Consideration should be given to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.

Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.

E) Reliable Earthing - Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g. use of power strips).

14_ connecting with other device

CONNECTING EXTERNAL DEVICES

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

VGA

HDMI eSATA

RS485

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

CONNECTING THE USB

1. By factory default, a USB port is provided for external connection.

2. You can connect a USB HDD, USB memory or mouse to the USB port.

3. If a USB HDD is connected to the system, recognition and settings are available in “ Main Menu > Setting the

Device > Storage Device ”. (Page 47 )

4. This product supports hot-plugging, which connects/removes the USB device during the system operation.

J 

If you use the USB device for Backup purposes, format it with FAT32 on PC if it is not formatted on the DVR.

CONNECTING EXTERNAL SATA HDD (ESATA)

External SATA port is provided on the rear panel.

If connected to the system, the external SATA HDD (eSATA) can be recognized and configured in “ Main Menu >

Device > Storage Device ”.

J 

Use a cable shorter than 1 m for the external external SATA HDD (eSATA) connections.



Unexpected disconnection to a device in use which is connected via eSATA may restart the system. Check whether the device is in use before disconnecting it.



In the event of replacing an HDD of an external SATA HDD, please power off the external SATA HDD to change the HDD.

English _15


CONNECTING THE CAMERA (SDC-7340BC)

Equipped with the IR LED and the illumination sensor, enables you to monitor at night as well as in daytime.

The camera is suitable for both internal and external use.



Please make sure not to fully expose the camera to rain. The camera must be installed under a shelter to avoid exposure to excessive rain b c

Name Description

IR LED These infrared LED's are controlled by the illumination sensor.

b

Lens Focal length of 3.6mm enables you to cover relatively longer range of monitoring.

c

Illumination Sensor Detects incoming light to control the IR LED.

BNC Cable BNC terminal for video signal output.

Power Cable Used to plug the power cable.


Connecting with DVR



The following figures are based on Model SDR-5102.

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

VGA

AUDIO OUT

HDMI

RS485

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

Installing the camera

The camera can be installed on the wall, ceiling, shelf or a desired position using the provided bracket.

1. Select a position where you want to install the camera.



Make sure the selected position can sustain the weight of the camera.

2. Attach the camera bracket to the wall using the supplied screw s.

1 SDC-7340BC : M4 X L20

M4 X L20 sized screws wall or ceiling

3. Adjust the camera to target the video location and tighten the camera bracket handle on the camera bracket.

Handle

Handle

4. Connect the camera cable to the camera.

J 

You should be careful when installing the camera outdoors because the cable connectors may be wet with moisture or pile up with impurities.



The camera satisfies the IP66 standard, and direct exposure to water or moisture may cause problem such as condensation.

English _17


CONNECTING THE RS-485 DEVICE

Connect the rear [ RS-485 +, – ] port to the PTZ camera.

J 

You can connect and control the PTZ camera which supports the RS-485 communication.



Check if the RS-485 device is compatible with the product first.



Pay attention not to change the polarity (+/-) of the RS-485 device when connecting it.



Depending on camera’s type, connection polarity can be different. For further information, refer to the respective PTZ Camera’s documentation.

RS485

CONNECTING THE NETWORK



The following figures are based on Model SDR-5102.

Connecting to network through Ethernet (10/100BaseT)

VIDEO IN

IN1

IN2

IN3

VGA

AUDIO OUT

HDMI eSATA

RS485

Hub/Switcher

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

RJ-45 Ethernet Cable

(Direct Cable)

Back Bone

Windows

Network Viewer

Hub/Switcher

NETWORK


Connecting to the Network using the router

VIDEO IN

Broadband Router

IN1

IN2

IN3

VGA

AUDIO OUT

HDMI eSATA

RS485

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

External

Remote PC xDSL or Cable Modem

NETWORK xDSL or Cable Modem

DDNS Server

(Data Center)

Connecting to Network through ADSL

VIDEO IN

ADSL MODEM

IN1

IN2

IN3

VGA

AUDIO OUT

HDMI eSATA

RS485

LAN

USB

DC 12 V

RJ-45 Ethernet Cable

(Direct Cable)

Phone(ADSL) Line

Windows

Network Viewer

Hub/Switcher

NETWORK

English _19

live

GETTING STARTED

Starting the system

1. Connect the power cable of the DVR to the wall outlet.

M 

It takes about 10 seconds to display the start screen after booting.

2. You will see the initialization screen.

The initialization process will last about 1 minute.

If a new HDD is installed, the initialization process may take longer.

3. The live screen appears with a beep.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

REC

2013-01-01

01:10:25

Shutting Down the System

You can shut down the system only if you have logged in to the DVR.

You require permission to shut down the system if you are not logged in as admin.

1. Press the [ POWER ] button on the remote control, or right-click to display the context sensitive menu and select

< Shutdown >.

2. The “ Shutdown ” confirmation window appears.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Shutdown

3. Use the arrow keys on the remote control to move to

< OK > and press the [ ENTER ] button or click < OK >. The system will shut down.

Are you sure to shutdown?

OK Cancel

2013-01-01

01:10:25 M 

For the permission management, refer to “ Permission

Management > Setting Permissions ”. (Page 39 )

20_ live

Login

To access a DVR or restricted menu, you should have logged in to the DVR.

1. In live mode, right-click any area of the screen.

You will see the context sensitive menu as in the right figure.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Login

2. Click < Login >.

The login dialog appears.

You can also see the login dialog to access a desired menu by pressing the [ MENU ] button on the remote control.



The login dialog will also appear if you press a menu button on the remote control when the corresponding menu requires logging in.



After logged in, press [ RETURN ] on the remote control to display the logout dialog.

Login x ID x Password admin

OK Cancel

J 







Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the


M 

For the restricted permission, refer to “ Permission Management > Setting Permissions ”. (Page 39 )

Locking All Buttons

This will restrict access to all buttons available in the DVR.

1. In Live mode, press buttons on the remote control in the order of [ STOP ( @ ) ] l [ FREEZE ] l [ STOP ( @ ) ] l [ FREEZE ] l

[ MENU ].

All buttons will be locked.

2. In the lock condition, press any button to display a dialog where you are prompted to enter the password for unlocking the buttons.

The button lock will be released if you enter the admin password.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Key Lock Password x ID x Password admin

OK Cancel

English _21

live

LIVE SCREEN CONFIGURATION

Icons on the Live Screen

You can check the status or operation of the DVR with the icons on the live screen.

b

20 13 -01-01 00:00:01 c

CAM 01 b

Name

Current Date, Time

Login Information c

Screen Mode

System Operation

Video Input Status

Description

Displays the current time and date.

When you are logged in, the “ LOG ON ” icon will be displayed.

Displayed if the zoom function is activated.

Freezes the screen temporarily.

Displayed in Auto Sequence mode where all channels are switched at the specific time interval.

This icon is displayed if a user with restricted access to the Record button tries to make manual recording.



Only the user with the applicable permission can release (stop) the recording.

Displayed if the HDD is full and the DVR has an insufficient space to record.

Displayed if no HDD is installed or the existing HDD should be replaced.

Displayed if the HDD needs a technical examination.

This will be displayed if the backup operation is in process.

Displayed if a new firmware is found from the network.

Displayed if no input is entered in the condition that the camera is set to < ON >.

Nothing will be displayed on the screen if the camera is set to < OFF >.

22_ live

Name

Camera Name/ Channel

Camera Operation

Description

Displays the camera name and the changed channel, if any.

Displayed in PTZ setting, and highlighted yellow if PTZ is in operation.

Displays AUDIO ON/MUTE.

Not displayed in video mode if deactivated.

Displayed if a motion detected in the condition that the motion detection is set to

< ON >.

Appears when the Tampering Detection is set to < ON > and a tampering attempt is detected.

Displays the current record mode from Record/Event/Schedule.

Error Information

1 If the internal HDD is not connected, the “NO HDD”( ) message will appear; if there occurs a problem, you will see the “HDD FAIL”( ) message in the top left corner. In this case, make sure you contact the service center for assistance as this may cause a failure of recording, playback or backup.

M 

If you see NO HDD, HDD FAIL icons on the screen, contact the service center for more details.

Live Screen Menu

In addition to the buttons on the remote control, you can access a desired menu by right-clicking the mouse any area in live mode.

The context sensitive menu that appears by right-clicking the screen may differ, depending on the login/ logout, screen split mode and DVR operation mode.

M 

Menu items of Search, Record, Backup and Shutdown can be deactivated, depending on the user permission.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

PTZ Control

Zoom In

Audio off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

< Split Mode Menu > < Single Mode Menu >

English _23

live

Split Mode Menu

The context sensitive menu in split mode differs, depending on the login/logout status. c b

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Menu

Scene Mode b

Audio On/Off c

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record/Stop

Play

Search

Backup

Description

Refer to “ Live Mode ”. (Page27)

Refer to “ Audio On/Off ”. (Page 30 )

Refer to “ Freeze ”. (Page 30 )

Stops the alarm output and the event monitoring. Refer to “ Event Monitoring ”.(Page 31 )

Starts/stops the standard recording.

Plays the search result (data). Refer to “ Search & Play > Play ”. (Page 79 )

Refer to “ Search & Play > Search ”. (Page 76 )

Refer to “ Main Menu > Setting the Backup ”. (Page 58 )

Main Menu Accesses the main menu. Refer to the Using the DVR section. (Page 32 )

Shutdown Turns down the DVR.

Show/Hide Launcher Shows or hides the launcher. Refer to “ View the Launcher Menu ”. (Page 26 )

Login/Logout You can log in or out.

24_ live

Single Mode Menu

The single mode menu is available only in Single Mode.

The context sensitive menu for the One Channel mode, in Split mode is different from that of the Single mode.

b

Full Screen

PTZ Control

Zoom In

Audio On

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Alarm Freeze

Menu

Full Screen b

Zoom In

Description

Select and click a desired channel in Split mode to switch to the full screen of the selected channel.

Enlarges the selected image. (Page 30 )

English _25

live

View the Launcher Menu

The Launcher menu appears on the bottom of the live screen.

1. In Live mode, right-click to display the context menu and select < Show Launcher >.

2. Move the cursor to the bottom and click a desired item in the Launcher menu.

M 

If no input is entered for 10 seconds, the menu will disappear.



The Launcher menu can be accessed only by using the mouse.



SDR-4102, SDR-3102 does not support the 16-split screen mode.

2013-01-01

01:10:25

2013-01-01

01:10:25 b

2013-01-01

01:10:25

2013-01-01 01:10:25 c

Menu Description

Date/Time

Displays the current time and date.

The indication of AM/PM is displayed if you set 12 hours for the time format in “ System >

Date/Time/Language > Time ”. (Page 32 ) b

Screen Mode

Press this button to switch the screen mode in sequence.

The current mode is highlighted in white.

c

Menu Expansion Button Click to display the hidden menu to the right.

Audio Turns ON/OFF the sound of the selected channel.

Zoom

PTZ

Alarm

Freeze

Play

Record

Enlarges the selected area. This is available only in Single Live mode.

Runs the PTZ Control launcher.

The PTZ control launcher will be active on the Live screen after you select a single channel.

Stops the alarm if it's activated.

Freezes the Live screen temporarily.

Enters Play mode if a file to play exist, and if not, enters Search mode.

Start/End recording the Live screen.

26_ live

LIVE MODE

SDR-5102 display Live images from 16 channels in a total of 8 layout of split screens.

Switching the screen mode

To switch the split mode, select a screen mode in the launcher menu, or right-click to select a screen mode in the context menu.

Press the [ MODE ] button on the remote control to switch the mode in the sequence of the launcher menu items.

M 

SDR-4102, SDR-3102 does not support the 16-split screen mode.

CH1

CH5

CH9

CH2

CH6

CH10

CH3

CH7

CH11

CH4

CH8

CH12

CH13 CH14 CH15

16-split mode

CH16

CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6

CH7 CH8 CH9

9-split mode

CH1 CH2

CH3 CH4

4-split mode

CH2

CH1 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6

7-split mode

CH7

CH2

CH6

CH3 CH4 CH5

CH7

CH8 CH1 CH9

CH10 CH11 CH12

13-split mode

CH13

CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6

CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16

16(A)-split mode

CH1

PIP

CH2

CH1

Auto Sequence

Switching the split mode

SDR-5102 display 16 Live images in the sequence of Single, 4-split and 9-split modes.

Auto Sequence

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

CH1

Single mode

1

16

CH1 CH2

CH1

CH1

CH3

CH1

CH3

CH3

CH2

CH3

CH2

CH4

CH4

CH4

CH4

13-16

1-4

5-8

9-12

4-split mode

CH2

CH1 CH2 CH3

CH1

CH4

CH2

CH5

CH3

CH6

CH4

CH7

CH5

CH8

CH6

CH9

CH7 CH8 CH9

10-16

1-9

9-split mode

English _27

live

M 

In Single mode, If you have set < SEQ-Dwell Time > in “ Setting the Device > Camera ”, Auto Sequence will be conducted at the set interval. (Page 44 )



In a split mode, If you have set < Multi CH SEQ Time > in “ Setting the Device > Monitor ”, Auto Sequence will be conducted at the set interval. (Page 51)

Manual Switching

Press the left/right button on the remote control, or click the arrow <

◄

/

►

> key to move to the next split mode.

1 If pressing the right [ ► ] button in 9-split mode :

9-split (CH 1~9) mode p 9-split (CH 10~16) mode p Auto Sequence

CH1

CH4

CH7

CH2

CH5

CH8

CH3

CH6

CH9

CH10

CH13

CH16

CH11

CH14

CH12

CH15

CH1

CH1

CH4

CH2

CH2

CH5

CH3

CH3

CH6

CH4

CH7

CH7

CH5

CH8

CH8

CH6

CH9

CH9

10-16

1-9

1 If pressing the right [

►

] button in 4-split mode :

Channel (CH 1~4) p Channel (CH 5~8) p Channel (CH 9~12) p Channel (CH 13~16) p Auto Sequence

CH1

CH3

CH2

CH4

CH5

CH7

CH6

CH8

CH9

CH11

CH10

CH12

CH13

CH15

CH14

CH16

CH1 CH2

CH1 CH2

CH1

CH3

CH1

CH3

CH3 CH2

CH3 CH2

CH4

CH4

CH4

CH4

13-16

1-4

5-8

9-12

28_ live

Channel Setting

You can display the channel in a desired area of a split screen.

1. Place the cursor over the camera name of each channel to display the <

▼

> key to the right on the screen.

2. Click a camera name to display a channel list where you can select a different channel.

3. Select a desired channel and click it.

The current channel will be switched to the selected one.

Use the cursor to select a channel to move, and drag and drop it to a desired channel; this can also change the channel position.



Ex : if switching CH 1 to CH 7

CH1

CH5

CH9

CH13

CH2

CH6

CH10

CH14

CH3

CH7

CH11

CH15

CH4

CH8

CH12

CH16

CH7

CH5

CH9

CH13

CH2

CH6

CH10

CH14

CH3

CH1

CH11

CH15

CH4

CH8

CH12

CH16

Switching to Single Mode

When in split mode, select and double-click a desired channel to switch to its Single mode.

Press the number corresponding to a desired channel on the remote control to switch to its Single mode.

1 CHANNEL 1–9 : Press each button between 1 to 9. (8CH : 8)

1 CHANNEL 10 : Press the [ 0/+10 ] button.

1 CHANNEL 11–16 : Press the [ 0/+10 ] button first, then press any number between 1 to 6 within 1 second.

Refer to “ Remote Control > Using the numeric buttons ”. (Page 12 )



Ex : If double-clicking CH 3 or pressing the number “3” on the remote control.

CH1

CH5

CH9

CH13

CH2

CH6

CH10

CH14

CH3

CH7

CH11

CH15

CH4

CH8

CH12

CH16 CH3

English _29

live

ZOOM

This is available only in Single Live mode. In Single mode, select a desired area and use the Zoom function to enlarge it twice.

1. Select < Zoom In > in the right-click menu.

Press the [ ZOOM ] button on the remote control, or simply click < box appears.

2. Use the direction keys, or drag and drop to specify an area to enlarge.

> in the launcher menu. The zoom

3. Press the [ ENTER ] button, or double-click the selected area to enlarge it twice.



In the enlarged image, use the direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) on the remote control to move the enlarged area.

4. Press the [ ZOOM ] button on the remote control, or simply click < the zoom.

> in the launcher menu to release

2013-01-01 01:10:25

AUDIO ON/OFF

You can turn the sound on/off corresponding to the channel in Live mode.

AUDIO On/Off in Single mode

Click the audio icon ( ) on the screen, or press the [ AUDIO ] button on the remote control to turn it on/off.

M 

Only the channel where < Audio > is set to < ON > in “ Device > Camera ” displays the audio icon ( ) in Live mode that you can use to turn the sound on/off.

FREEZE

This is available only in Live mode, this pauses playing the Live image temporarily.

1. Press the [ FREEZE ] button on the remote control, or click < > in the launcher menu.

The playback of the image is stopped temporarily.

2. Press the [ FREEZE ] button again, or click < >.

This will release the freeze.

30_ live

EVENT MONITORING

This will display the channel in sync with a specific event (Motion/Tampering/Video Loss) if it occurs.

In “ Monitor > Event Display ”, set the event monitoring to ON/OFF and specify the event display time. (Page 51 )

1 If multiple events occur simultaneously, the screen will switch to a split mode.

- 2~4 events : 4-split mode



1 If the second event occurs within the set time of < Event Display >, the first event will last until the second one is terminated. (Page 51 )



Ex : If you set < Event Display > to 5 seconds, and only one event occurs in CH 1.

Event occurrence 5 seconds

Stop alarm

CH1



Ex : If you set < Event Display > to 5 seconds, and the second event occurs in CH 2 within the set time after the first event occurred in CH 1.

Event occurrence 4 seconds 9 seconds

Stop alarm

CH1 CH2

CH1

M 

Press the [ ALARM ] button to reset the alarm settings and to release the event mode.



If an alarm activates in the condition you have set the event record, and pre/post alarm times, the event record will be performed.

J 

In case of continuous events such as motion detection, switching to another split mode display may not immediate if concatenating events follow, even when you stopped alarm of the event.

English _31

main menu

You can setup the system properties, devices, and options for recording, event, backup and network.

SYSTEM SETUP

You can setup Date/Time/Language, Permission, System Properties and Log.

Date/Time/Language

You can check and setup the current Date/Time and time related properties, as well as the language used for the interface on the screen.

Setting the Date/Time/Language

Set the Date/Time/Language

Using the mouse may help make setup easier.




If not logged in, it prompts with login window.

Refer to “ Login ”. (Page 21 )

2013-01-01 01:10:25

2. Use the left/right buttons ( ◄ ► ) to select the < System >.

System property setup menu is selected.

3. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) to select < Date/Time/

Language > and press the [ ENTER ] button.

4. Select < Date/Time/Language >.

A dialog to setup Date, Time and Language.

5. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to select an item to set and make your changes.

System

Date/Time/Language

Permission Management

System Management

Log Information

Logout Return

32_ main menu

1 Date : Sets the date that will appear on the screen.

You can select the date format.

1 Time : Sets the time and its format that will appear on the screen.

Select either one from < 24 Hours, 12 Hours (AM/PM) >.

1 Time Zone : Sets the time zone of your area based on the

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).



GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) is standard World Time and the basis of world time zone.



Holiday x Date x Time x Time Zone x Time Sync. x DST x Language

2013 -01-01 YYYY-MM-DD

08:14:24

GMT

Setup

Dec First (Sun) 0

English

1 Time Sync. : You can set the DVR’s current time synchronized to a selected < Time Server > regularly if you select to use < Time Server >.

In this case, < Date/Time/Language > setup does not allow time adjustment.

24 Hours

OK Cancel

Dec First (Sun) 0

- Time Server : Enter an IP or URL address of the time server.



Holiday

- Last Sync Time : Displays the most recent synchronization time from the selected time server.

- Activate as Server : Set to < Use as a Time Server for other DVRs.

> to allow the DVR to act x Time Synchronization Setup x Synchronization x Time 08:14:24 x Time Server x Time Zone GMT+08:00

Use

24 Hours

203.248.240.103

x Last Sync Time x Time Sync. Setup Not x Activate as Server x DST

Use

Dec First (Sun) 0H

Fail

Dec First (Sun) 0H

1 DST : Set up Daylight Saving Time with its period to make the time earlier than the GMT of its time zone by 1 hour during the set period.

x Language English

OK Cancel

1 Language : Select your language. Sets the language for the interface.

English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, Chinese(Simplified), Russian, Korean, Polish, Japanese, Dutch,

Portuguese, Turkish, Czech, Danish, Swedish, Thai, Romanian, Serbian, Croatian, Hungarian, Greek, Chinese

(Traditional), Finnish and Norwegian are available.

OK Cancel

6. When the Date/Time/Language setup is done, press < OK >.

M 

You can also use numeric buttons on the remote control to enter values for Date, Time and other numeric fields.

English _33

main menu

Setting Holiday

You can set specific dates to Holidays according to your preferences.

Holidays are applied to < Recording Schedule > and < Alarm Schedule > too.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Date/Time/Language > window to select < Date/Time/Language >, and press the [ ENTER ] button.

2. Select < Holiday >.

A calendar for Holiday setup appears.

3. Use the left/right < > buttons to select year or month, and press the [ ENTER ] button.



Holiday

2013 Jan

Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13

20

27

14 15 16 17 18 19

21 22 23 24 25 26

28 29 30 31

OK Cancel

4. Use direction buttons (

▲▼◄ ►

) to select a desired date, and press the [ ENTER ] button.

You will see the “ Setting Holiday ” screen.



Ex : Select January 9th and check on < 1/9 > only to make every

January 9th a holiday. Check both on < 1/9 > and

< Jan 2nd Wed > to make every January 9th and 2nd

Wednesday of January holidays.

5. When the Holiday setup is done, press < OK >.



Holiday

2013 Jan

1 2 3 4 5

1 / 9

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Jan 2nd Wed

13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28 29 30 31

OK Cancel

Using the Calendar


Select year and month.

Select the left/right < adjust by 1 year/month.

> key on the left/right side of year/month and press [ ENTER ] button to

Use direction buttons to select a date and press [ ENTER ] button.



A date with recorded data to be searched will appear in yellow in the System Log, Event Log, Time Search and

Event Search.

34_ main menu

Permission Management

You can set permissions of each user over the DVR's specific function and settings.

Setting the Administrator

You can set and change Administrator’s ID and password.

The administrator can use and set all menu items and functions.


1. Use the up/down buttons (

▲▼

) in < System > window to move to < Permission Management >, and press

[ ENTER ] button.

2. Select < Admin >.

A dialog for Admin ID and Password input appears.

3. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to move to a desired item, and set the ID and password.


Admin

Group User x ID x New Password x &RQ¿UP3: admin

************

************

Setup

M 


OK Cancel



Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage information


4. When the administrator setup is done, press < OK >.

Using Virtual Keyboard

For alphanumeric inputs, the virtual keyboard window appears.

Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to move to a desired character, and press the [ ENTER ] button.

In the upper text input box of the virtual keyboard, there displays a list of candidate words containing the selected character.

q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \ Del

a s d f g h j k l ; ‘ Caps Lock

z x c v b n m , . / Shift

Space Ctrl

OK Cancel

Select a word from the list, or use the keyboard to enter the whole word.



If there are many of candidate words, use < , > buttons to move between them forward and backward.

Select < OK >.

Entered word is applied.



For upper case letters, use < Caps Lock > button.



For special characters, use < Shift > button.



Using the virtual keyboard is the same to a normal keyboard use in your region.



You can enter only lower-case alphabets and numeric values for the user ID.



For the password, use alphabets and special characters excluding < \ > and < “ >.



You can use number buttons on the remote control.

English _35

main menu

Setting the Group

You can create user groups and setup permissions for those user groups.

You can register a user for each group in < User >.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < System > window to move to < Permission Management >, and press

[ ENTER ] button.

2. Select < Group >.

A window for < Add >, < Delete >, < Rename >, and

< Group Authority > setup appears.


Admin

Group x Group x G roup Authority

Live View

Search

Backup

3. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to move to a desired item, and set the value.

1 Add, Delete, Rename : You can add, delete, rename a group or modify the permissions given to the group.

The virtual keyboard appears when < Add > or < Rename > was selected.

You can add up to 10 groups.

Setup

Setup

Setup

User

Add Delete Rename

OK Cancel

Setup

- Add : When you first run the DVR with the admin account, only the admin account exists. Add has already been deactivated. Select < Add > to display the virtual keyboard. Enter a group name. You can add up to

10 groups.

- Delete : Deletes a user group that is already registered. Selecting Delete will delete all user accounts belonging to that group.

- Rename : Renames a group that is already registered. Select < Rename > to display the virtual keyboard.



For entering a group name, refer to “ Using Virtual Keyboard ”. (Page 35 )

1 Group Authority : Sets permissions to access menu items of each group.

Users of a group can access checked functions.

4. When the group setup is done, press < OK >.

To set the group authority

You can set the permissions of the group users to access the menu according to the channel.

1. Select a menu to which the group permission is assigned.

The menu where the group permission is assigned will be displayed in the Live menu when a group user logs in.

1 Live View : You can set the permission to access the Live screen according to the channel.



SDR-4102 shows a list of 8 channels in Channel Setup window.

1 Search : You can set the permission to access the Search menu according to the channel.

1 Backup : You can set the permission to access the Backup menu according to the channel.


Admin

Group

User Setup x Group ABC Add Delete Rename x G Channel Setup

Live View Setup

All

Search Setup

Backup

1 2 3 4

Setup

5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

OK Cancel

OK Cancel

2. Select < OK >.

Select and assign a group user so that the user can access the specified menu.

36_ main menu

To restrict the user permissions

If the admin restricts all permissions of an added group, the users belonging to that group can access only the default minimum menus and can change the user’s own password only.

1. Start the DVR.

If all permissions are restricted, only the Login dialog should appear.

2. Log in with a registered user ID.

Login x ID x Password abc

OK Cancel

3. Right-click any area on the screen.

If all permissions are restricted, only the accessible context menus should appear.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

User Menu

Hide Launcher

Logout

To change the user password

If you log in with a user account that is restricted to access the menu, you can change your own password only.

1. Log in with your account.


User 2. Select < User Menu >.

The Permission Management setup screen appears.

3. Select < Permission Management >.

The Password setup dialog appears.

x ID x New Password x &RQ¿UP3: abc

************

************

4. Enter a new password.

5. Select < OK >.

You change to the password will be applied.

OK Cancel

English _37

main menu

Setting the User

Users can be added only if a group was created in < Group > menu.



[ ENTER ] button.


Admin Group x Group All Group

Group Name

2. Select < User >.

A window for Add User appears.


▲▼◄ ►

) to select < Add > from the window.

A window for “ Add User ” appears.

You can configure the Network Viewer settings including name, ID, viewer, Select Group and password.

Result of the user setup appears in the < User > window.

To change the user property, use “ Edit User ”.

The “ Edit User ” window appears when you select a desired item to be changed in the < User > window.

1 Viewer : If you select < Use >, you will be given access to the

Web Viewer and Network Viewer.



Refer to “ Connecting Web Viewer ”. (Page 82 )



For more information about use of SmartViewer , refer to the

SmartViewer 's user guide.

OK Cancel


Admin Group x Group

User

ID

User

Name x ID x Viewer x Select Group x Password x &RQ¿UP3:

ID

Not Used

ABC

OK Cancel

Setup

Viewer

Add

Del

Previous/Next Page

Setup

Viewer

Add

Del

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

4. When the user setup is done, press < OK >.

38_ main menu

Setting Permissions

You can set restricted access for all general users.

Items with restrictions will require logging in for use.



[ ENTER ] button.


Admin Group x Restricted Access

Live View Search

User

Backup All

Setup

2. Select < Setup >.

The Restricted Access, Restriction on Network Access,

Auto Log out, Manual Input of ID setup screen appear.


1 Restricted Access : All menu items allowed for a user can be set with restricted access.

- Checked ( ) : Restricted x Restriction on Network Access

All Network Web Viewer x Auto Log out x Manual Input of ID

OFF

ON OFF

OK Cancel

- Not checked ( ) : Accessible



If it is not checked ( ) in < Restricted Access >, any user can access the item no matter what the < Group Authority > setting.



If it is checked ( ) in < Restricted Access >, a user can access the item only if the user has permission in < Group

Authority > setting.

1 Restriction on Network Access : Restricts remote access from a < Restricted Access > network.

- All Network : Restricts all access instances via Network Viewer and Web Viewer.

- Web Viewer : Restricts access via the Web Viewer.

1 Auto Log out : A user will be automatically logged out if there is no operation on DVR for over set period of time.

1 Manual Input of ID : Prompts you to enter the user ID manually for the login process.

- Checked ( ) : Encloses the registered user IDs with the

[ ½ ] symbols.

Use the virtual keyboard to enter the user ID.

Login x ID x Password

*****

4. When the permission setup is done, press < OK >.

OK Cancel

English _39

main menu

System Management

You can check the system version, update to a newer version, as well as data backup and initialization.

Checking the System Information

You can check the current system version, broadcasting system, MAC address. You can update the system.



▲▼

) in < System > window to move to < System Management >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

2. Check the

Address.

Software Version , Broadcast Format, and MAC

1 System Information : Shows the current system’s information.

The values can not be changed by a user.

1 S/W Upgrade : Updates the DVR’s software up to date.

1 DVR Name : Assigned name will be displayed in Network

Viewer, when connected to the DVR.


System Information

Settings x System Information x Software Version x Broadcast Format x MAC Address v1.0xh_yymmddhhmmss

NTSC

00:00:F0:54:FF:FF x S/W Upgrade x Device x Version

Network

No S/W Data x DVR Name DVR

Previous

Search

OK

1 Updating the Software

1. Connect a device storing the software to be updated.

(It may take about 10 seconds to recognize the device.)



Upgradeable devices include USB memory and network device.



To update the network, the current DVR should have been connected to the network.

Upgrade via the proxy server may not be enabled due to the restricted access.



Settings x System Information x Software Version v1.0xh_yymmddhhmmss

x

System Upgrade x MAC Address

New Version x S/W Upgrade x Device x Version v1.0xh_yymmddhhmmss

Do you want to upgrade?

Network

OK

No S/W Data

Cancel

Search

DVR OK x DVR Name

2. Select < System Management > from < System > window.

3. Select < System Information >.

Previous

4. When the recognized device appears, select < Upgrade >.



The < Upgrade > button will be activated only if the current < Software Version > of the < System Information > is same to or older than that of < S/W Upgrade >.

5. Press < OK > in the “ System Upgrade ” window.



While updating, it shows the progress.



Settings x S ystem Information x Software Version x Version

V1.0xh_yymmddhhmmss

x S/W Upgrade x MAC Address 00:00:F0:54:FF:FF

Software upgrading...

x S /W Upgrade x Device USB2FlashStorage

V1.0xh_yymmddhhmmss

Upgrade

Previous

40_ main menu

6. When the updating is done, it automatically restarts.

Do not turn the power off until it finishes restarting.

M 

If “ Upgrade Failed ” appears, retry from the step 4.

When you experience continued failure, consult the service center for assistance.



When you perform S/W update remotely using Smart Viewer, it may take a max of 3 minutes to complete the update since

Smart Viewer popped up a confirmation message. This is to guarantee that the DVR set operates stably. For a faster update, use the USB cable to connect to the DVR set.

English _41

main menu

Settings

You can copy and import the DVR settings by using a storage media.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < System > window to move to < System Management >, and press [ ENTER ] button.



Settings

2. Select < Settings >.

A window of storage device and load factory default appears.

x Storage Device x DVR p USB x USB p DVR

38010100

0 MB (Remained Capacity)

Export

No data Import

Include Network Settings

Default x Load Factory Default


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to a desired item, and export or import settings data to a storage device.

Previous

1 Storage Device : Shows the connected storage device.

1 DVR p USB : Exports DVR settings to the connected storage device.

1 USB p DVR : Imports DVR settings from the storage device and applies to the DVR.



If < Include Network Settings > is checked, the network settings will be imported too.

1 Load Factory Default : If < Default > is selected, a confirmation dialog for “ Load Factory Default ” prompts.

Press < OK > to initialize the system to the factory default.



Settings

4. To move to the previous menu, press < Previous >.

x Storage Device x DVR p

Load Factory Default

0 MB (Remained Capacity)

Export x USB p DVR No date Import x Load Factory Default Cancel

Previous

Log Information

You can browse logs on the system and events.

System Log

System Log shows log and timestamp on every system start up, system shutdown, and changes on system settings.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < System > window to move to < Log Information >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Log Information

System Log

Event Log Backup Log

Search

2. Select <



System Log

Refer to “

>.

Using the Calendar ”. (Page 34 )

Click on the calendar < > to display the calendar window.

Search Day

First Page

No.

2013 -01-01

Last Page

Date/Time

1 Type : When there are too many logs, you can display logs of the desired format by selecting the type.

1 Export : All logs recorded in the DVR are exported to the storage media.

Export

3. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to move to a desired item, and press < Search >.

Previous

Previous/Next Page

42_ main menu

Event Log

Event log shows recorded events on alarms, motion detections and video loss.

It also shows the log and its timestamp.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < System > window to move to < Log Information >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Log Information

System Log

Event Log

2. Select < Event Log >.

3. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to move to the desired item.

4. Set Search Day, Channel and Type and the press

< Search >.



Refer to “ Using the Calendar ”. (Page 34 )

Click on the calendar < > to display the calendar window.

Backup Log

Search Day

First Page

No.

4

3

2

1

7

6

5

2013 -01-01

Last Page CH

Search

All CHs

Motion Detection [CH 7]







Type View all

Date/Time

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

2013-01-01 00:02:18

Previous/Next Page

Export Previous

Backup Log

You can find out who backed up and the details (backup time, channel, device to use, file format, etc.).


1. In the < System > window, press the up/down ( ▲▼ ) button to move to < Log Information > and press the [ ENTER ] button.

Log Information

System Log

Search Day

First Page

No.

Event Log

Backup Log

2013 -01-01 ~ 2013 -01-02

Last Page

Search

Previous/Next Page

User Date/Time

2. Select < Backup Log >.

3. Use the four direction buttons (

▲▼◄ ►

) to move to a desired item.

4. Specify a search term and select < Search > in the right corner.

Backup details for the search term will be listed.

Export Previous

English _43

main menu

SETTING THE DEVICE

You can configure the settings of: Camera, Storage Device, Remote Device and Monitor.

Camera

Setting the Camera

You can set Video, Audio, Channel Name and Dwell Time of a Camera.



2. Use the left/right button ( ◄ ► ) to select < Device >.

Device setting menu is selected.

3. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) to move to < Camera >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Device

Camera

Storage Device

Remote Device

Monitor

Logout Return

4. Select < Camera >.

You will see a window where you can configure the camera settings including Video, Audio, Channel Name,

SEQ-Dwell Time and Privacy Region .


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to a desired item, and set the value.

Camera

Camera

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 Video

- < ON/OFF > : You can turn ON/OFF the selected channel’s camera.

Screen Setup

- < Covert1 > : Shows information other than the video of the selected channel.



For privacy protection, it does not display the video while the recording continues.

PTZ b Audio CH

CAM 01

CAM 02

CAM 03

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF b b b b

CAM 04

CAM 05

CAM 06

CAM 07

CAM 08

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

5 sec

Previous/Next Page b b b b b b b b

Privacy Region

OK Cancel

- < Covert2 > : Shows nothing but an empty screen while the recording continues.

M 

If the channel is set to < Covert1 > or < Covert2 > mode, the channel’s sound is not hearable.

However, the channel’s sound is recorded if its Audio setting is set to < ON >, even the sound is not heard in Live mode.

1 Audio

- If set to < ON >, you can turn the audio of the channel ON on the Live screen.

- If set to < OFF >, the channel’s audio is off on the Live screen and not recorded.



Audio output is available for only 1 channel.



SDR-4102/5102 support audio of 1 to 4 channels only.

1 CH Name : Up to 15 characters including blanks are allowed.



Refer to “ Using Virtual Keyboard ”. (Page 35 )

1 SEQ-Dwell Time : You can set the dwell time between channels for the Live screen.



If set to < OFF >, the channel is not listed in the Auto Sequence mode.

44_ main menu

1 Screen Setup : The video appeared on the screen may vary depending on the channel’s camera, configure the DVR display to your preferences.

Select a channel and adjust the < (Brightness) >,

< (Contrast) >, and < (Color) > of the selected channel.



Press the < Init > to initialize settings back to the default 50.

1 Privacy Region : You can specify a certain area of the camera video to be protected for your privacy.

6. When the camera setup is done, press < OK >.

Screen Setup

OK Cancel

Init Apply to All CH

To set the privacy region

Select < Privacy Region >.

When “ Privacy Region ” window appears, select a channel for detection and set the area of motion detection.

1 To set the area in “ Privacy Region ” window

In the “ Privacy Region ” window, select desired region from < >.

1 Privacy Region

You can specify up to 4 privacy zones for each channel, which can be identified by the color.

1 Purple 2 Green 3 Blue 4 Yellow

Privacy Region

CH1

Privacy Region1

Individual

OK Cancel

Apply to All CH

1 To set the area using < Individual > selection

When selected < Individual >, “ Privacy Region ” window disappears and you can select cells one by one.

When the motion area setup is done, Right-click to select < Menu > in the context menu or the [ MENU ] button on the remote control to display the “ Privacy Region ” window again.

- Clear All : Selected cell is removed from the Privacy Region.

Clear All

- Menu : After selecting individual motion areas, move to the “ Privacy Region ” window.



If selected < Apply to All CH >, selected motion area is applied to all channels.

When completing the privacy zone settings, click < OK >.

Menu

English _45

main menu

Setting the PTZ

To use Camera’s PTZ functions, ID and protocols of each camera and DVR should be matched.

For other settings, refer to the < Remote Device > settings. (Page 50 )


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Device > window to move to < Camera >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Camera

Camera PTZ

2. Select < PTZ >.

A window of PTZ settings appears.


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to a desired item, and select it.

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 Port : Select a port control method for the camera that is connected to a channel.



You have two choices : < RS-485 > and < Coaxial >.



For the < Coaxial > type, only SDR-5102 is supported.

1 ID : Set the ID of the connected camera of each channel.

You can easily setup by using the numeric buttons on the remote control.

1 Protocol : Set the protocol of the connected camera of each channel.

ID Protocol

RS-485 b 0

RS-485 b 1

RS-485 b 2

RS-485 b 3

RS-485 b 4

RS-485 b 5

RS-485 b 6

RS-485 b None

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

M 

You can check the camera’s ID and protocol if you turn the camera off and on after connecting it to the DVR .



For the < Coaxial > type, CCVC and PELCO-C protocols are supported.



For the < Coaxial > type, only SDR-5102 is supported.

4. When the PTZ setup is done, press < OK >.

46_ main menu

Storage Device

You can check information on storage devices.

Confirming Devices

You can check storage devices and their free space, usage as well as status.

Devices available are HDD, and USB devices (Memory, HDD).



▲▼

) in < Device > window to move to < Storage Device >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Storage Device

Device

Format

2. Select < Device >.

1 No. : Shows the assigned number of the internal HDD.



To see the detailed positioning of the HDD according to the number, refer to < HDD Map >.

Device

HDD

No.

1

Used/Total

3.92G/0.98T

Usage

Internal

Status/Management

Normal

1 Used/Total : Shows the used/total capacity of the storage device.

1 Usage : Sets the storage device’s usage.

OK Cancel

- USB memory is used only for backups.



External USB HDD, SATA HDD are used for extension and backup.



A maximum of 2TB for each port is supported for backup on a high capacity SATA HDD such as RAID equipment.



If an eSATA HDD device is used for extended storage or backup purposes, disconnecting eSATA device may restart the system.

For backup use, the device can be disconnected if it’s not in use.

1 Status/Management : Shows the current status of the HDD, as in Normal/Check/Replace.

- Normal : Available to use

- Check : Available to use but recommended to replace

- Replace : Requires immediate replacement.

HDD Alarm

3. To move to the previous menu, press < OK >.

English _47

main menu

Formatting

You can format a storage device.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Device > window to move to < Storage Device >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

2. Select < Format >.

A window for selection of device for formatting appears.

3. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to select a device to be formatted.

Storage Device

Device

Format

Device

HDD

Select

1

HDD Alarm

Used/Total

3.92G/0.98T

Usage

Internal

Format

OK Cancel

4. Select < Format > on the bottom of the screen.

Press < OK > on the “ Manage ” confirmation window will start formatting the selected device.

5. When the formatting is done, press < OK >.

Storage Device

Device

Format

HDD Alarm

Device

HDD

Manage

Select

1

Used/Total

3.92G/0.98T

Formatting deletes all recordings.

Proceed formatting?

Recording stops few second.

OK Cancel

Format

OK Cancel

Usage

Internal

48_ main menu

HDD Alarm

You can set alarm settings for HDD defects such as Check Alarm Output Port, Replace Alarm Output Port, and its duration.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Device > window to move to < Storage Device >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Storage Device

Device Format

HDD Alarm

2. Select < HDD Alarm >.

A window for setting HDD check and replace output ports and their durations appears.

x Check Alarm Output Port x Duration

BEEP

OFF x Replace Alarm Output Port BEEP


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to the desired item.

x Duration OFF

1 Check Alarm Output Port : If HDD generates check alarm, the alarm signal will output to the specified alarm output port.

OK Cancel

1 Replace Alarm Output Port : If HDD generates replace alarm, the alarm signal will output to the specified alarm output port.

1 Duration : Sets the alarm duration for the alarm signal and beep sound.

- If < BEEP > was selected, a beep will sound.

M 

< Check > status means that the HDD is operating but it has problems that require technical examination.

( ) appears on the Live screen.



< Replace > status means that the HDD has defect and requires immediate replacement.

( ) appears on the Live screen.



If the installed HDD is not recognized properly, a confirmation popup will appear.

4. When the HDD Alarm setup is done, press < OK >.

English _49

main menu

Remote Devices

You can set the RS-485 communication for use of PTZ Camera and system keyboard with the DVR.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Device > window to move to < Remote Device >, and press [ ENTER ] button.


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to the desired item, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Remote Device

Baudrate

Remote Control

Parity Data

None b 8

ON ID 0

Stop Bit

1 b

Transfer type

Half Duplex

3. Set the values of each communication setup of the remote device.

1 Baudrate : Baud rate settings of the DVR, PTZ camera and system keyboard should be matched for proper operations.

4. Make sure to match IDs of the DVR, System Keyboard and Remote Control, and press < OK >.

OK Cancel

M 

For changing the remote control’s ID, refer to “ Changing the Remote Control ID ”. (Page 13 )

50_ main menu

Monitor

You can configure information to be displayed and its format for Spot Out monitor.

Setting the Monitor



▲▼

) in < Device > window to move to < Monitor >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Monitor

Monitor

Mode

2. Select < Monitor >.

x Event Display OFF x Display Date x Multi CH SEQ Time 5

Time CH Name Icon


▲▼◄ ►


1 Event Display : Sets the dwell time of the event channel display on the monitor when an event occurs.

If selected < Continuous >, it displays the channel until you press [ ALARM ] button to release it.

x VGA/HDMI 1280X720 x HDMI Resolution Auto Detection ON

Display Position Setup

OK Cancel

1 Display : Displays only checked items on the monitor screen.

1 Multi CH SEQ Time : Sets the interval between automatic display switching in 4-split and 9-split mode of the Live screen.

1 VGA/HDMI : Set your preferred screen resolution to < VGA > or < HDMI >.

If the monitor does not support selected resolution of < VGA > or < HDMI >, it may not display video properly.

1 HDMI Resolution Auto Detection: If the option is checked on and the HDMI is available, DVR will automatically adjust optimized resolution based on monitor's setting. If you need to configure the resolution manually, please turn the option off.

4. When the monitor setup is done, press < OK >.

Screen Setup

Some monitors many not display information (camera name, icon, time information, etc.) about the DVR, depending on the condition. Then, you can change the display position of the data.

1. In the < Device > window, press the up/down (

▲▼

) button to move to < Monitor > and press the [ ENTER ] button.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

2. Select the < Monitor > item.

3. Select < Display Position Setup > in the bottom.

You will move to the < Display Position Setup > window.

4. Use the four direction buttons or the number buttons on the remote control to adjust the data position.

Display Position Setup

30

30

30

OK Cancel

30

English _51

main menu

Setting the Screen Mode

You can configure the Live screen and Split Screens.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Device > window to move to < Monitor >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

2. Select < Mode >.


1 Live Screen : Select split modes for the Live screen.

16-, 9-, and 4-split screens are included by default.

1 Play Screen : Select split modes for the playback screen.

Only the 13-split screen is optional.

Black shows the playback while white shows the Live screen.

4. When the screen mode setup is done, press < OK >.

Monitor

Monitor x Live Screen

Mode x Play Screen

OK Cancel

Live Play

52_ main menu

SETTING THE RECORDING

You can setup scheduled recording, event recording and other recording related settings.

Recording Schedule

Make your reservation on a date and time to schedule the recording on specified time.



2. Use the left/right button (

◄ ►

) to select < Record >.

Record menu is selected.


▲▼

) to move to < Recording

Schedule >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Record

Recording Schedule

Event Record Duration

REC Quality & Resolution

Record Option

Logout Return

4. Select < Recording Schedule >.

A window of scheduled recording setup appears.


▲▼◄ ►


1 Channel : Select a channel to set the recording schedule time and date format.

1 Recording type : Select each time cell, and then select a type to start recording.


CH1

All

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Hol

0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7

No Recording Continuous

Event Both(Cont&Evnt)

0 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Apply to All CH

OK Cancel

1 Apply to All CH : If selected < Apply to All CH >, “ Apply to

All CH ” window appears.

Press < OK > to apply the setup to all channels.

6. When the recording schedule setup is done, press < OK >.

M 

Event recording and scheduled recording starts about 3 seconds prior to the event/schedule for guaranteed recording.


CH1

All

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Hol

0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7

Apply to All CH

0 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Apply recording schedule to all channels?

OK

No Recording Continuous

Event Both(Cont&Evnt)

Cancel

Apply to All CH

OK Cancel

English _53

main menu

Recording Color Tags

Color

White

Orange

Blue

Green

Part Names

No Recording

Continuous

Event

Both(Cont&Evnt)

Functions

No schedule / event recording

Scheduled recording only

Event recording only

Both scheduled / event recordings

Each press of a selected cell will cycle through < No Recording >-< Continuous >-< Event >-

< Both(Cont&Evnt) >.

Event Record Duration

You can set the beginning and ending point of a recording on an event.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Record > window to move to < Event Record Duration >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Event Record Duration


▲▼◄ ►


1 Pre Event : The recording of an event will start at a pre-determined time prior to the actual occurrence of the event.

If it is set to 5 seconds, the recording begins from

5 seconds before the event.

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1 POST Event : The recording will continue for a pre-determined time after the actual end of an event.

If it is set to 5 seconds, the recording ends in 5 seconds after an event.

Event POST

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF b b b b b b b b

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF b b b b b b b b

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

3. When the event recording duration setup is done, press < OK >.

REC Quality / Resolution

You can set resolution, FPS, and quality of recordings by channel, and by recording type of standard / event.

For more information about the resolution, refer to the “ Product Specification ” section. (Page 114 )

Setting Standard Recording Properties

You can set each channel’s resolution, quality and FPS for normal recordings.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Record > window to move to < REC Quality & Resolution >, and press

[ ENTER ] button.


Standard

Event

2.

3.

Select < Standard >.

When the recording setup is done, press < OK >.

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CIF

CIF b Record b b 7fps b b 7fps b

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

54_ main menu

Setting Event Recording Properties

You can set each channel’s resolution, quality and FPS for event recordings.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Record > window to move to < REC Quality & Resolution >, and press

[ ENTER ] button.


Standard

Event

2. Select < Event >.

Event recording setup window appears.


▲▼◄ ►

) to move to a desired item, and select it.

1 Resolution : Sets the resolution of the recorded screen.

1 Record Rate : Image Per Second, means the frames recorded per a second.

1 Record Quality : Sets the recording quality.

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8 b Record b

4CIF

4CIF b 7fps b b 7fps b

4CIF

4CIF

4CIF

4CIF b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b b 7fps b

4CIF

4CIF b 7fps b b 7fps b

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

M 

You cannot increase the remaining count if the current remaining count has reached zero or there is no available remaining count from any other page. If this is the case, reduce the remaining count for the current page, or do so for the same channel on any other page.

4. When the Event recording setup is done, press < OK >.

Record Option

You can set the recording to stop or overwrite when the HDD is full.



▲▼

) in < Record > window to move to < Record Option >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Record Option


▲▼◄ ►


1 Disk End Mode : If selected < Overwrite >, recording will continue despite the HDD full while overwriting the oldest.

If selected < Stop >, the recording will stop when the HDD is full.

1 Disk End Beep : If selected < Stop >, the button is activated.

If you check it, the beep will sound on the disk full and the recording stops.

x Disk End Mode x

Overwrite

Disk End Beep

180 day

The recording information will be deleted.

x Record Status x HDD Free Space : x Recordable (Date/Time) :

Do you want to proceed?

OK

986 GB / 989 GB

Cancel

OK Cancel

1 Auto Delete : If you check it, Record Period setup is activated.

If you specify the auto deletion period, the recording data before the period will be deleted automatically.



This option will be enabled only if Disk End Mode is set to < Overwrite >.

1 HDD Free Space : Shows remaining free space available on the HDD.

1 Recordable (days/hours) : Shows estimation of remaining days and hours for recording, based on the remaining free space.

3. When the recording option setup is done, press < OK >.

English _55

main menu

SETTING THE EVENT

You can set recording options when motion, image loss detection or tampering event occurs.

Motion Detection

You can set target detection region and motion, as well as the alarm signal output.

When the motion detection region is set, it detects motion within the area.




◄ ►

) to select < Event >.

Event setting menu is selected.


▲▼

) in < Event > window to move to < Motion Detection >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

A window of motion detection area setup appears.

Motion Detection


▲▼◄ ►


1 Mode : Sets whether to activate motion detection.

1 Sensitivity : Sets the sensitivity level of the motion detection.

1 Alarm : Sets the alarm output method.



For further information on alarm output, refer to “ HDD Alarm >

Alarm ”. (Page 49 )

1 Alarm Duration : Sets the duration of alarm signal and alarm sound.

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Mode Sensitivity

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

OFF b Level10(High)

Previous/Next Page

Motion Region

OK Cancel

5. When the motion detection setup is done, press < OK >.

Setting the Motion Detection Area

Select < Motion Region >.

When “ Motion Region ” window appears, select a channel for detection and set the area of motion detection.

1 To set the area in “ Motion Region ” window

In the “ Motion Region ” window, select desired region from < >.

1 To set the area using < Individual > selection

In the “ Motion Region ” window, you can select cells individually by using < Individual >.

Motion Region

CH1

Individual

OK Cancel

Apply to All CH

When selected < Individual >, “ Motion Region ” window disappears and you can select cells one by one.When the motion area setup is done, press the < Menu > on the screen or the [ MENU ] button on the remote control to display the “ Motion Region ” window again.

- Select : Selected cell is set to be a part of motion detection area.

- Unselect : Selected cell is removed from the motion detection area.

- Inverse : Unselected cells are set to be the motion detection area.

- Menu : After selecting individual motion areas, move to the “ Motion Region ” window.



If selected < Apply to All CH >, selected motion area is applied to all channels.

When the motion detection setup is done, press < OK >.

Select

Unselect

Inverse

Menu

56_ main menu

Video Loss Detection

You can set the alarm to be generated on a camera disconnection, which causes a video loss.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Event > window to move to < Video Loss Detection >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

A window of video loss detection area setup appears.


1 Video Loss State : Sets whether to activate video loss detection.






1 Alarm Duration : Sets the duration of alarm signal and alarm sound.

Video Loss Detection

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Video Loss State b Alarm

OFF b None

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF b None b None b None

OFF

OFF

OFF b None b None b None b None

Previous/Next Page

Help

OK Cancel

3. When the video loss detection setup is done, press < OK >.

Tampering Detection

You can set to detect tampering attempts and trigger events, such as sudden change of camera’s framing direction, blocked lens and other overall change of scenes from the video.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Event > window to move to < Tampering Detection >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Tampering detection settings screen appears.


1 Mode : Set whether to use Tampering Detection or not.

1 Sensitivity : Set the sensitivity level of tampering detection.

1 Alarm : Set the alarm output method.

1 Duration : Set the alarm signal output and its dwell time.

Tampering Detection

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Mode Sensitivity b

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

OFF b Medium

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

3. When the tampering detection setup is done, press < OK >.

M 

Since the tampering detection is designed and optimized to function in accordance with the user defined sensitivity level, it may not render a significant difference in detection with varied sensitivity in general monitoring situations.



When the tampering detection mode is set < ON >, it is recommended that the pre event recording time of the corresponding channel should be set to 10 seconds or longer.

English _57

main menu

Alarm Schedule

You can set the conditions and operating hours for scheduled alarms.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Event > window to move to < Alarm Schedule >, and press [ ENTER ] button.


▲▼◄►







Alarm Schedule

BEEP

All

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Hol

0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

1 ON : Marked in orange, and always generates alarm on scheduled time.

1 OFF : Marked in white, no alarm is generated even if an event occurs.

1 Event Sync : Marked in Blue, generates alarm only when an event occurs.

OK Cancel

M 

When the alarm is generated on the scheduled time, you can stop the alarm by canceling the schedule.

3. When the Alarm Schedule setup is done, press < OK >.

BACKUP

You can check the backup device and set the backup schedule by channel or by time.

The product only supports external HDD of USB memory and USB/SATA type. (Page 114 )

Setting the Backup

You can backup the desired data to a connected device.



2. Use the left/right button ( ◄ ► ) to select < Backup >.

Backup menu is selected.

3. Press the [ ENTER ] button.

Backup

Logout Return

Backup

58_ main menu

A backup window appears.

You can directly access it from the “ Live screen menu ”.

(Page 23 )


▲▼◄ ►


1 Backup Range : Sets the < Start > and < End > time for the backup.

1 Channel : Sets the channel to backup.

You can select multiple channels.

1 Device : Select a backup device from the recognized devi ces.

1 Type : Sets the backup data format.

- DVR : Saved data can be played back only by the DVR.

Backup x Start x Overlap

ALL

2013 -01-01 00:01:06

List0 x End

OK Cancel

2013 -01-01 08:25:45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 x Device x Folder

USB-Storage

\20120101\

Check capacity x Type x File Name

SEC

0001

Backup :

Used :

Free :

Change

- AVI : You can set recording options when sensor, motion, image loss detection or tampering event occurs.



If you need to install a codec in Windows, run the x264_dvr.exe file in the codec folder that is created when you back up an AVI file.

- SEC : Saves data in the Samsung’s proprietary format with built-in viewer, which supports immediate playback on a PC.

1 File Name : You can set the back file name.




1 Check capacity : Shows the size of the selected backup data, used and available capacity of the selected backup device.

1 Overlap : Shows a list of overlapping data on a same time according to the number of data.

It appears when one channel has multiple data on a certain time point due to changing of time or time zone settings, etc.



Refer to time and time zone of “ Setting the Date/Time/Language ”. (Page 32 )

5. When the backup setup is done, press < OK >.



If no available device is recognized for backup, < OK > button is not activated.

J 

The application may slow down during the backup.



You can switch to the menu screen during the backup in operation, but playback of data is not available.



The data can be played back on a Webviewer while the backup is in progress but audio does not function.



When a memory device is used for backup, it is not available to use the full capacity of the media since the system consumes a part of its capacity.



If backup has failed, select “ Device > Storage Device ” and check the free space of the HDD and check also if the

HDD is properly connected.

M 

Pressing the < Exit > during the backup will return to the previous menu, while the backup progresses.

English _59

main menu

NETWORK CONFIGURATION

It provides networked monitoring of Live screen from a remote place, and supports mail forwarding function with events. You can configure the network environment which enables such functions.

Connection Mode

You can set the network connection route and protocol.

Setting the Connection

Sets the protocol and environment of the network.




◄ ►

) to select < Network >.

Network menu is selected.


▲▼

) to move to < Connection

Mode >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Logout Return

Network

Connection Mode

DDNS

Live Transfer

Mailing Service

4. Select < Interface >.

A window of connection mode setup appears.


▲▼◄ ►


1 IP Type : Sets the network connection mode.

1 Transfer Bandwidth : Sets the maximum data flow to be transferred. (Upload speed)

Options will vary depending on the selected connection mode.

- For < Static >, < DHCP > : Select one from 50 kbps ~

2Mbps, and Unlimited.

- For < PPPoE >, select one from 50 kbps ~ 600 kbps.

1 IP Address , Gateway, Subnet Mask, and DNS

- For < Static > : You can directly input IP Address, Gateway,

Subnet Mask and DNS.

- For < DHCP > : IP Address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask are set automatically.

- For < PPPoE > : IP Address, Gateway, and Subnet Mask are set automatically.

1 ID , Password : In case you selected PPPoE , provide the

“ ID ” and its “ Password ”.

M 

DNS server for < DHCP > and < PPPoE > can be set by user only if you selected < Manual >.

6. When the connection setup is done, press < OK >.

Connection Mode

Interface

Port x IP Type Static x Transfer Bandwidth 2Mbps x IP Address 192.168.1.200

x Gateway 192.168.1.1

x Subnet Mask x DNS

255.255.255.0

Manual 168.126.63.1

OK Cancel

Connection Mode

Interface

Port x IP Type PPPoE x Transfer Bandwidth 600kbps x IP Address x Gateway x Subnet Mask x DNS

192.168.1.200

192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

Manual 168.126.63.1

OK Cancel

60_ main menu

Setting the Port


▲▼

) in < Network > window to move to < Connection Mode >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Connection Mode

Interface

Port

2. Select < Port >.


1 Protocol Type : Select the protocol type between TCP and

UDP.

- TCP : If compared to UDP, TCP connection is more stable but slow. Recommended for Internet connection.

x Protocol Type TCP x Device Port 4520 4524 x x

UDP Port

Unicast/Multicast x Multicast IP Address x Multicast TTL x HTTP Port

8000 ~ 8160

Unicast

224.126.63.1

80

5 x Secure Video Transmission ON OFF

* Multi Browser Support:

Device Port 4505~4530, HTTP Port 80

OK Cancel

- UDP : If compared to TCP, UDP connection is less stable but fast. Recommended for use in LAN environment.



If selected UDP, selections of Device Port , UDP Port and Unicast/Multicast are activated.



If setting the connection mode to PPPoE , you cannot select UDP for the protocol type.

1 Device Port : Initially, < 4520~4524 > is set. It increases / decreases by 5.

- TCP: It has better stability and lower speed when compared to UDP, and recommended for internet environments.

1 UDP Port : Initially, < 8000~8160 > is set. It increases / decreases by 160.

1 Unicast/Multicast : Select one between UDP-Unicast and UDP-Multicast .

If selected Multicast, Multicast IP and TTL are activated.

- UDP- Unicast : Transfers data packet to an individual client.

- UDP-Multicast : Allows data communication to multiple clients causing no additional traffic to the network.

1 Multicast IP Address : User can directly input.

1 Multicast TTL : Select from 0 ~ 255. Initial value for the TTL is set to < 5 >.

1 HTTP Port : Enter the port number for the Web Viewer. Initially, it is set to < 80 >.

1 Multi Browser Support : The Web Viewer can be used with a browser that supports the Silverlight.

The multi viewer can be used only if the HTTP port is set to 80, protocol type is TCP and device ports range within 4505-4530.

This is for the Siliverlight’s security purposes.

1 Secure Video Transmission: Determine the network video transmission data is encrypted or not.

Encrypt: ON, Not Encrypt: OFF.

If you set the secure video transmission mode, the max bandwidth performance will be limited.

When ON is selected, multi browser is not supported.

4. When the protocol setup is done, press < OK >.

English _61

main menu

Notification

J 

In a multi-browser environment, the < HTTP Port > should be set to 80 (private port).

Select one between 4505 and 4530 for RTSP

1 Network Overview

Router (External IP: 109.112.92.133,

Local IP: 192.168.1.1

Cable/ADSL

Modem

Internet

DDNS Server

(www.samsungipolis.com)

POWER REC NETWORK

DVR 1

POWER REC NETWORK

DVR 2

Local PC

System

IP

Protocol

Private Port

Public Port

WEB

192.168.1.200

TCP

80

80

DVR 1

RTSP

192.168.1.200

TCP

4520~4524

4520~4524

Connection Mode

Interface


x Gateway 192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

x Subnet Mask x DNS Manual 168.126.63.1

WEB

192.168.1.202

TCP

81

81

DVR 2

Connection Mode

Interface


x Gateway 192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0


RTSP

192.168.1.202

TCP

4525~4529

4525~4529

OK Cancel OK Cancel

Connection Mode

Interface

Port x Protocol Type TCP x Device Port 4520 4524

8000 ~ 8160 x UDP Port x Unicast/Multicast x Multicast IP Address

Unicast

224.126.63.1

x Multicast TTL x HTTP Port 80




OK Cancel

Connection Mode

Interface



Unicast

224.126.63.1





OK Cancel

62_ main menu

1 1st Set Port Forwarding Setting

Port Forwarding is 4520~4524

(4520, 4521, 4522, 4523, 4524)

SDR-5102

192. 168. 1. 200

1 2nd Set Port Forwarding Setting

Port Forwarding is 4525~4529

(4525, 4526, 4527, 4528, 4529)

SDR-5102

192. 168. 1. 202

4525

4525

Port Forwarding is 80

SDR-5102

192. 168. 1. 200

Port Forwarding is 81

SDR-5102

192. 168. 1. 202

81

81

English _63

main menu

Connecting and Setting the Network

Networking may differ from the connection method, check your environment before setting the connection mode.

When no router is used

1 Static mode

- Internet connection : Static PPPoE , leased line, and LAN environments allows connection between the DVR and remote user.

- DVR Network Settings : Set the < Connection Mode > in

< Interface > menu of the connected DVR to < Static >.



Consult your network manager for IP Address , Gateway and

Subnet Mask.

Connection Mode

Interface


x Gateway 192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0


1 DHCP mode

- Internet connection : Connect the DVR directly to a cable modem, DHCP PPPoE modem or FTTH network.


< Interface > menu of the connected DVR to < DHCP >.

OK Cancel

1 PPPoE mode

- Internet connection : An PPPoE modem is directly connected to the DVR, where the PPPoE connection requires user ID and password.


< Interface > menu of the connected DVR to < PPPoE >.



< ID > and < Password > should be the same to the PPPoE user information.

If you don’t know the ID and password, consult your PPPoE service provider.

Connection Mode

Interface

Port x IP Type PPPoE x Transfer Bandwidth 600kbps x IP Address x Gateway x Subnet Mask x DNS

192.168.1.200

192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

Manual 168.126.63.1

x ID ID x Password

************

OK Cancel

64_ main menu

When a router is used

J 

To avoid IP address conflict with the DVR's static IP, check followings :

1 Setting the DVR with a static IP

- Internet connection : You can connect the DVR to a router which is connected to an PPPoE/Cable modem or a router in a Local Area Network (LAN) environment.

1 Setting the DVR Network

1. Set the < Connection Mode > in < Interface > menu of the connected DVR to < Static >.

2. Check whether the set IP address is in the static IP range provided by the Broadband Router.

IP Address , Gateway, and Subnet Mask : Consult your network manager.



Check whether the set IP address is in the static IP range provided by the Broadband Router.

J 

If a DHCP server is configured with starting address (192.168.0.100) and end address (192.168.0.200), you should set the IP address out of the configured DHCP range (192.168.0.2 ~ 192.168.0.99 and 192.168.0.201 ~

192.168.0.254).

3. Check the Gateway address and subnet mask are equal to those set in the Broadband Router.

1 Setting the DHCP IP Address of the Broadband Router

1. To access the Broadband Router’s configurations, open a web browser on the local PC that is connected to the Broadband Router and enter the router’s address (ex : http://192.168.1.1).

2. At this stage, make the local PC's windows network configurations to the below example :

Ex) IP Address : 192.168.1.2

Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0

Gateway : 192.168.1.1

- Once connected to the Broadband Router, it prompts with password. While entering nothing to the User

Name field, enter “ admin ” into the password field and press < OK > to access the router configurations.

- Access the router’s DHCP configuration menu and set its DHCP server activation, and provide the start and end address.

Set the start address (192.168.0.100) and end address (192.168.0.200).

M 

Above steps may differ from the router devices depending on the manufacturer.

English _65

main menu

1 Setting Router’s Port Forwarding

1. Set the protocol to < TCP >.

2. External Port Range : Enter the TCP Port set in the

< Device Port > in < Port > menu of the connected DVR.

If more than one DVRs are connected to the router, the

TCP port can be different.

3. Internal PC IP Address : Enter the IP address set to the

< IP Address > in < Interface > menu of the connected

DVR.

4. Internal Port Range : Set the same to the “ External Port

Range ”.

Connection Mode

Interface



Unicast

224.126.63.1





OK Cancel

M 

Above steps may differ from the router devices depending on the manufacturer.

Port forwarding is required when you want to access the DVR connected to the router from outside of the router’s network.

DDNS

You can set the DDNS site for a remote user’s network connection.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Network > window to move to < DDNS >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

DDNS Setup screen appears.

DDNS x DDNS Site x Server Name x Product ID x Quick Connect iPOLiS www.samsungipolis.com

Not Used Use

2. Use the virtual keyboard to enter the < Product ID >.






If selected < OFF > in put fields are deactivated.



If selected < iPOLiS >, the server name field is disabled.

x DDNS Host Address http://www.samsungipolis.com/

1 DDNS Site : Set whether to use DDNS or not, and select the DDNS site if enabled.

1 Server Name : Enter the server name of the selected DDNS site.

1 Product ID : Enter the product ID which was registered to the DDNS site.

1 Quick Connect : Appears if the < DDNS Site > is set to < iPOLiS >.

To use this feature, connect the DVR to a UPnP router and set to < Use >.

OK Cancel

M 

If the quick connect setup has been cancelled while progressing, it is automatically set to < Not Used >.

3. When the DDNS setup is done, press < OK >.

66_ main menu

DDNS Setting

DDNS is a short form of Dynamic Domain Naming System.

DNS (Domain Name System) is a service that routes a domain name consisting of user friendly characters

(ex : www.google.com) to an IP address consisting of numbers (64.233.189.104).

DDNS (Dynamic DNS) is a service that registers a domain name and the floating IP address with the DDNS server so that the domain name can be routed to the IP address even if the IP is changed in a dynamic IP system.

1 Setting DDNS in the DVR

Set < Protocol Type > in the < Port > menu of the connected DVR to the following :

Ex) Protocol Type : TCP

Device Port : 4520~4524

DDNS Site : iPOLiS

1 DDNS Settings of the Router

Select the corresponding menu for the network transfer protocol of the router.

1 SETTING UP SAMSUNG iPOLiS DDNS

Go to Your PC

1. Open your browser and go to http://www.samsungipolis.com and click < LOGIN >.

2. You first need to create an account.

Click < SIGN UP >.

3. Follow the account registration instructions on the website.

4. After completing the account registration, login to your account.

5. Add your DVR to your account. Click < PRODUCT

REGISTRATION >.

6. Create a name(Product ID) for your DVR. Use 4 to 20 alphanumeric characters without spaces. Select classification, model number of the DVR and click

< REGISTER >.

7. After registration, you should see your product in the list.

English _67

main menu

Go back to DVR

1. From network tab, click on < DDNS >.

Connection Mode

DDNS

Live Transfer

Mailing Service

Logout Return

Network

2. Under DDNS Site, select < iPOLiS >.

DDNS x DDNS Site x Server Name x Product ID x Quick Connect iPOLiS www.samsungipolis.com

Not Used Use x DDNS Host Address http://www.samsungipolis.com/

OK Cancel

3. Under Product ID, enter the product ID you created on the

Samsung iPOLiS website.

Under Quick Connect, select < Use > and click < OK >.

DDNS x DDNS Site iPOLiS x Server Name www.samsungipolis.com

x Product ID sdr5102dhome x Quick Connect Not Used Use x DDNS Host Address http://www.samsungipolis.com/sdr5102home

OK Cancel

M 

If the connection was not successful, your router may not be supporting UPNP.

For more information on enabling UPNP on your router, please see Router manual.

DDNS x DDNS Site iPOLiS x Server Name x

Connection www.samsungipolis.com

x Quick Connect Not Used Use x DDNS Host Address

OK

OK Cancel

68_ main menu

Live Transfer

Sets the quality of the image that is transferred from the DVR to the network.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Network > window to move to < Live Transfer >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

The Live Transfer window appears.


▲▼◄ ►


1 Resolution: Shows the selected network profile’s resolution setting.

1 Quality: Shows the selected network profile’s image quality setting.

Live Transfer

CH

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Resolution b

CIF

CIF b Low b Low

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF

CIF b b

Low

Low b Low b Low b Low b Low

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

3. When the live transfer is done, press < OK >.

English _69

main menu

Mailing Service

You can send an e-mail to a DVR-registered user at a specific time interval, or if an event occurs.

M 

If an event occurs with a channel where the camera’s video is set to < OFF > or the remaining recording count is set to < OFF >, only the text notification will be sent to the applicable email address.

J 

If you set the interval of the e-mail notice too short, the e-mail server may consider it as spam that will not be transferred normally.

SMTP Setting

Sets the SMTP mail server.


1. Use the up/down buttons ( ▲▼ ) in < Network > window to move to < Mailing Service >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Mailing Service

SMTP

Event Group

2. Select < SMTP >.

You will see the SMTP setting window.

x ServerType x Server Address x Port

SMTP mail Server


1 ServerType : Displays the connected server type.

1 Server Address : Enter a server to connect to.

1 Port : Sets the communication port.

1 Use Authentication : Check this if the SMTP server uses user authentication.

The account input box will be activated.

Use Authentication

ID

Password x Secure Transfer Never x Sender Address

E-mail Test

1 ID : Enter a user to use authentication when connecting to the SMTP server.

1 Password : Enter the password of the SMTP server user.

1 Secure Transfer : Select one from < Never > and < TLS (if available) >.

1 Sender Address : Use the virtual keyboard to enter the sender’s e-mail address.




1 E-mail Test : Conducts the test on the server settings.

OK

25

Cancel

4. When the SMTP setup is done, press < OK >.

Recipient

70_ main menu

Event Setting

You can set the interval and type of the event that will be sent to the user.



Mailing Service

SMTP

Event

Group Recipient

2. Select < Event >.

x Event Interval 10 min


x Use Event Transfer

Motion

Change P/W

Tampering

HDD Info

Power On/Off Manual Record

1 Event Interval : Set the event interval.



If a series of events occurs, the e-mail will be sent at the specified interval, not on each event.

OK Cancel

1 Use Event Transfer : Select an event type to send if an event occurs.

If the selected event occurs, the e-mail will be sent to the group that has the recipient authority.

Video Loss

4. When the event setup is done, press < OK >.

Group Setting

You can set the group to whom the e-mail is sent, and specify the permission for each group.

You can add recipients for each group in the < Recipient > menu item.

The recipient is set separately from the DVR user group.



▲▼

) in < Network > window to move to < Mailing Service >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

Mailing Service

SMTP Event

Group

2. Select < Group >.

x Group x Recipient Permission

Motion Tampering

Add


▲▼◄ ►


1 Add : Select < Add > and use the virtual keyboard to add a group.




1 Delete : Deletes the selected group.

1 Rename : You can reset the recipient permission of an existing group.

1 Recipient Permission : Set the permission of the recipient group.

Change P/W

Power On/Off

HDD Info

Manual Record

OK Cancel

Recipient

Delete Rename

Video Loss

4. When the group setup is done, press < OK >.

English _71

main menu

Recipient Setting

You can add/remove a recipient(s) to/from the specified group and edit the group if necessary.



Mailing Service

SMTP Event Group

2. Select < Recipient >.


x Group All Group

Group Name

Recipient

Add

Delete

OK Cancel

Previous/Next Page

1 Add : You can select a recipient name, e-mail address or group.

You should have created a group in the < Group > menu item before you can add a user to the group.



For inputting the recipient name and email address, refer to

“ Using Virtual Keyboard ”. (Page 35 )

4. When the recipient setup is done, press < OK >.

Mailing Service

SMTP Event Group x Group ABC

Add recipient

Group Name x Name x Email x Select Group ABC

OK Cancel

Recipient

Add

Delete

Previous/Next Page

OK Cancel

72_ main menu

CONTROLLING A PTZ DEVICE

The DVR enables you to adjust the settings of a PTZ camera as well as an ordinary one to your preference.

PTZ Device

The PTZ device can be activated only if a channel in connection with the PTZ camera is selected.

Getting started with PTZ

The PTZ camera is available, only if a channel is selected, in the following way :



Using the remote control buttons

Press the [ PTZ ] button on the remote control.



Using the launcher menu

Click < PTZ > to display the live launcher.



Using the right-click menu in Live mode

Right-click any area on the screen to display the context menu, and select < PTZ Control >.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

PTZ Control

Zoom In

Audio

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout



Using icons on the live screen

Click the < > icon on the live screen.

M 

The PTZ function is available only if the PTZ camera is connected so that the < > icon is displayed on the screen.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

English _73

main menu

Using the PTZ camera

You can use one camera to perform all functions of PAN, TILT and ZOOM for monitoring multiple places and set the preset to your preference in a desired mode.

1. Launch the < PTZ Control > menu.

As the < > icon on the bottom right corner turns yellow, you access the “ PTZ Control ” mode to display the

“ PTZ Control ” menu.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

M 

Be sure to configure PTZ working environments before operation, since the PTZ Working(Active) mark can be appeared to be activated even when PTZ is not operative.

PTZ Control CAM01

Swing

Group

Trace

Preset

Tour

Select

Select

Select

Select

Camera Setup

Select Preset

Save Rename

Delete Delete All 2. Use the PTZ wheel in the launcher menu to adjust the monitoring area, or use the direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) on the remote control to move the camera to a desired place.

Exit

1 PTZ Wheel : Clicking a nearer point to the center will move in that direction slowly; clicking a farther point from the center will move fast.



Keep clicking left to rotate the lens counter clockwise; keep clicking right to rotate the lens clockwise.

1 Zoom (

1 IRIS (

) : You can use the Zoom function of the PTZ camera.

) : Adjusts the intensity of radiation incoming to the iris.

1 Focus ( ) : Enables you to adjust the focus manually.

1 Swing : Moves between the preset start point and end point.

1 Group : Moves in the path specified by combining the preset, pattern and auto pan.

1 Trace : Moves camera’s framing in the predefined path.

1 Preset : Sets the preset position for camera framing and moves to designated preset position when selecting a desired preset.

1 Tour : Moves in the path specified by combining multiple groups.



For the coaxial communications, the operation may differ depending on the protocol.



For the < Coaxial > type, only SDR-5102 are supported.

M 

Before entering the PTZ device control mode, set the values of the PTZ device in the < Setting the PTZ > menu.

(Page 46 )



For camera specifications that supports PTZ comtrol depending on communication method, refer to our web site.

74_ main menu

Preset Setting

A preset is a set of specific target points of a PTZ camera, and up to 127 presets per a camera can be stored.


1. In PTZ Control mode, use the direction buttons to adjust the camera in a desired direction.

2. Select the < Save > key.

The virtual keyboard for inputting the preset will appear.




1 Save : You can add and save the preset.

1 Rename : You can change the settings of the existing presets.

1 Delete : Deletes the selected preset.

1 Delete All : Deletes all existing presets.

M 

If you replace the camera of the channel that stores the preset list with a new one, you should reset the preset accordingly.

3. Press < OK >.

The preset will be saved as a name that you entered.

Camera Setting

A PTZ camera has its own menu system. Optimize the PTZ camera according to the DVR.


1 Select < Camera Setup > in the PTZ Control menu.

The camera-specific menu appears.



You can configure the settings of only those cameras that support the protocols of Samsung, Pelco D/P, AD and Panasonic.



If you are setting Auto Pan or Pattern in the camera menu, press and hold the appropriate button for a certain time so that the button operation can be different from that in normal PTZ setting.

Camera Setup

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Exit

English _75

SEARCH

You can perform the search for recorded data by the time or by the search criteria such as an event.

You can access the < Search > menu directly in Live mode.

1. In Live mode, right-click any area of the screen.

The Live menu appears.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

2. Select < Search

Or, press the [

>.

SEARCH ] button on the remote control.

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

3. The Search menu appears.

4. The search can be restricted by the Auto Delete function.

Refer to “ Setting the Recording > Record Option ”.

(Page 55 )

M 

Overlapped data : It only appears if there exists overlapped data on a certain time, produced due to the change of DVR’s time setup. The latest data comes first, from < List0 >.

It does not appear in < Backup Search >.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Time Search

Event Search

Backup Searc h

M otion Search

Return

Time Search

You can search for recorded data of a desired time.

As the time to display may be different depending on the time zone and the DST standard time, the time of data recorded in the same time can be displayed differently depending on time zone and DST settings.


1. Select < Time Search > in the < Search > menu.

2. Select a date to search.



Refer to “ Using the Calendar ”. (Page 34 )

Time Search

2013 -01-01 Go to First Go to Last

3. The record data on the specific date will be listed.

The display bar is different according to the data type.

So check the data type for the color in the left pane.


▲▼◄ ►

) to set the search criteria and press the [ ENTER ] button.

2013 /01/01 00:01:17

Standard Schedule

Motion Etc

V.Loss

Tampering

Overlapped Data List1

00:01

All

CAM 01

CAM 02

CAM 03

CAM 04

CAM 05

CAM 06

CAM 07

1 Go to First : Moves to the earliest date.

Play Return

1 Go to Last : Moves to the most recent date.

1 Time : Enter a time to perform the search or use the up/down button <

>

> to select one.

1 Previous/Next Page : Moves to the previous / next page. (Use the remote control)

1 Zoom In : The map enlarges in detail.

Zoom In

Data

Zoom Out

Previous/Next Page

76_ search & play

It will switch in the sequence of 24 hours - 16 hours - 8 hours

- 4 hours.

1 Zoom Out : The map will switch in the reverse order of the detailed mode above.

It will switch in the sequence of 4 hours - 8 hours - 16 hours

- 24 hours.

M 

Double-click a desired time to zoom it in/out.

1 Preview : Click < Channel > and select (click, drag) a time in

< Duration > to display a still image for the portion.

Time Search

2013 -01-01 Go to First Go to Last

2013 /01/01 00:01:17

Standard Schedule

Motion Etc

V.Loss

Tampering


00:01

All

CAM 01

CAM 02

CAM 03

CAM 04

CAM 05

CAM 06

CAM 07

Play Return

- If the selected channel does not contain any recorded data, it will be marked black.

Zoom In

Data

Zoom Out

Previous/Next Page

5. Select a data item and click < Play >.

The screen switches to the data playback mode.

Event Search

You can search for events by the channel and play them.


1. Select < Event Search > in the < Search > menu.

2. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to set the search criteria and press the [ ENTER ] button.



All record events on a specific date will be found. (Normal/

Schedule recording included)

1 Date/Time Preview : If you select a data item in the list, the still image of the selected data will be displayed in the left preview pane.

1 Event : Displays the type of the event that occurred.


The screen switches to the event data playback mode.

Event Search

CAM 01

2013 -01-01


No.

3

2

1

View all

Go to First

02:47:54 ~ 02:48:59

00:39:06 ~ 00:40:30

00:01:22 ~ 00:02:28

Go to Last

Event

Motion

Motion

Motion

2013 /01/01 00:01:22

Previous/Next Page

Play Return

Backup Search

Searches for backup data in the connected backup device.

Only data in the format of DVR is included in the search.

Refer to < Type > in “ Backup > Setting the Backup ”. (Page 58 )


1. Select < Backup Search > in the < Search > menu.

2. Use direction buttons ( ▲▼◄ ► ) to set the search criteria and press the [ ENTER ] button.

1 Record Period : Displays the record period.

1 Channel info : Displays the recorded channel.

1 Play Start Time : Select a time that you start playing.


The screen switches to the backup data playback mode.

Backup Search

No.

1

Folder Name

20130101

USB:USB2FlashStorage

File Name

16190000 x File Name x Record Period x Play Start Time

Previous/Next Page x Channel info

2013 -01-01 01:01:01 - 2013 -01-01 01:01:10

2013 -01-01 16:30:52

Play Return

English _77

search & play

Motion Search

If a motion is detected in each channel, you can set a desired area to perform the search.

You can use the mouse to select the related items.

1. Select < Motion Search > in the < Search > menu.


▲▼◄ ►

) to set the search criteria and press the [ ENTER ] button.



If you set the motion area to < Manual Area >, the < Setup > button will be activated.

1 Motion Region : Select an area to perform the search.

- All Area : Searches for all areas of the selected channel.

- Current Area : Searches for the motion area for each channel specified in “ Motion Detection >

Setting the Motion Detection Area ”. (Page 56 )

- Manual Area : You can set the motion area manually.

1 Setup : The Setup button will be activated only if you have set the motion area to Manual. Press this button to display the area setting window.

1 Date/Time : The Date/Time will be automatically set by the hour, and the end time will be automatically set to one hour later than the start time if it is set.

1 Preview : Select a data item in the list to display the still image of the item.


The screen switches to the motion data playback mode.

Motion Search

Channel

Date/Time

CAM 01

2013 -01-01 03:41:18

Motion Region All Area

2013 -01-01 05:11:44

Overlapped Data List1 Go to First

2013 /01/01 01:01:30

No.

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Setup

Search

Go to Last

01:01:30

01:01:25

01:01:20

01:01:15

01:01:10

01:01:05

01:01:01

Previous/Next Page

Play Return

Motion Region

CH1

Individual

OK Cancel

Apply to All CH

78_ search & play

PLAYBACK

Play

You can play data stored in the HDD and backup a desired portion of the data.


1. In Live mode, click < Play > in the right-click menu or

< > in the launcher menu, or press the Play button on the remote control.

2. Use the up/down button ( ▲▼ ) to select a menu.



For data search, refer to < Search >. (Page 76 )

2013-01-01 01:10:25

Scene Mode f

Audio Off

Freeze

Stop Alarm

Record

Play

Search

Backup

Main Menu

Shutdown

Hide Launcher

Logout

3. Select a data item and click < Play > in the Search menu.

The selected data is played and the play launcher appears on the screen.



If there is an existing data, < Play > will start immediately without performing the search.

1 Playback Information : Displays the date and time of the current data in the top corner.

2013-01-01 01:10:25

REC

1 Backup : Click < > to set the current time to the start time of backup; you can specify a backup area using the mouse (yellow triangle).

Click < > again to set the current time to the end time of the backup and the “ Backup Range ” window appears.

- Type : Supports formats of DV R, AVI and S EC.

Refer to a list of formats in “ Setting the Backup ”.

(Page 58 )

- Device : Select a backup device.

- Check Capacity : Enables you to check the capacity of the selected storage device.

4. If you want to return to the Live screen in Play mode, click <

[  ] button on the remote control.

Backup Range x Start 2013 -01-01 00:01:06 x Device x Folder

Check capacity

USB-Storage

\ 20130101 \ x End 2013 -01-01 01:10:25 x Type x File Name

SEC

0001

Backup :

Used :

Free :

Change

OK Cancel

> in the launcher menu or press the

English _79

search & play

Using the Playback Button

REC

Part Names Functions

Play Timeline

Backward Slow

Play

Indicates the current playback point, and can be used to move.

b

Skip Backward Moves backward by unit time. (Move by 10 minutes) c Backward Fast

Play

Used for quick backward playback. (2 - 64x speed)

Used for backward frame-by-frame search while in PAUSE. (1/2 - 1/8x speed)

Step Backward Moves backward by one frame at a time.

Pause

Stop

Stops playing the current video temporarily.

Stops playback and moves to the live screen.

Step Forward Moves forward by one frame at a time.

Forward Slow

Play

Ensured to play forward up to 4 channels simultaneously at a low speed. (1/2 - 1/8x speed)



In a split mode, the real time playback may not be supported, depending on the record quality, resolution and number of channels. And some frame rates may be supported.

Forward Fast Play Used for quick forward playback. ( 2 - 64x speed )

Skip Forward Moves forward by unit time. ( Move by 10 minutes )

Return Return to the search setup screen.

m n

Audio

REC

Partial Backup

Mode Switch

Sets Audio ON/OFF.

Records all channels in Live mode.

Begins backup of the selected section of the video being played, with the specified starting/ ending point.

Click a desired playback mode or press [ MODE ] to switch the screen mode in sequence.



The grey area in the center of the 13-split mode plays the Live channel.

The default channel of the Live mode is CH1, which can be changed later.

80_ search & play

web viewer

INTRODUCING WEB VIEWER

What is Web Viewer?

Web Viewer allows remote access to your DVRs. You have access to li ve video, archived video, PTZ control

(if configured), etc.

Product Features

1 Remote access from a standard browser

1 Supports PTZ camera controls

1 Supports 1, 4, 9 , 16 camera viewing formats (maximum of

16 cameras in the list).

Network

G

1 Gets jpeg , bmp or png format images to print and save to “Print or Save jpeg , bmp or png format images”.

1 Record video in AVI format-compatible with popular media players. (needed the H.264 codec)

System Requirements

The following lists the minimum suggested hardware and operating system requirements needed to run the

Web Viewer.

OS

Web Browser

CPU

Memory

Monitor

HDD

Windows XP Professional

Windows Vista Home Basic / Premium

Windows 7

Mac OS 10.6 and later versions

Windows OS : Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher, Firefox 9 or higher, Chrome 15 or higher

Mac OS : Safari 5 or higher

Intel Pentium 4.2 GHz

512 MB

High Color 16-bit 1024 x 768

50 MB (Installation space required)

* Additional HDD space required for recording.

Recorded file size will vary depending on recording quality settings.

English _81

web viewer

CONNECTING WEB VIEWER (Windows)

1. Open your web browser and type the IP address or URL of

DVR into the URL address box.

M 

“ 192.168.1.200

” is set to IP by default.



Set to an available IP address in " Network > Connection

Mode ”.



The URL connection will be enabled only when the DDNS connection settings have been completed.

2. A user with the admin permissions should provide the admin ID and password. A registered user should provide the user ID and password.

J 

The default password can be exposed to a hacking thread so it is recommended to change the password after installing the product.








M 

It allows up to 10 simultaneous access including the Admin and general users.



It does not allow multiple login of the Admin user.



Password of the Admin and general users can be changed in < Permission Management > menu of the DVR.



Normal users should have set < Viewer > under < Permission Management > to “ Use ” before connecting to the

Web Viewer. (Page 35)



All settings are applied by the DVR’s settings.



If you change such as the permission settings with logged in to the Web Viewer, you may go back to the log in screen.

3. Click < Install ActiveX Control...

>.

4. When the installation confirm message appear, click [ Yes ] button.

82_ web viewer

5. When a program installation wizard window appears, press the [ Install ] button to install the program.

6. When the program installation is complete, the Explorer window closes.

Open the web viewer window again to log in.

Live Viewer's main screen appears when you log in successfully after installing the program.

English _83

web viewer

USING LIVE VIEWER (Windows)

The Live Viewer screen consists of following : b c

Menu Functions

Menu Selection Switches into corresponding menu screen by clicking each menu.

b

Address, Name, Time Displays the IP, model name, time, etc. of connected DVR.

c

DVR Time, PC Time

Select < DVR Time > or < PC Time > for the OSD time information display setting of the

Live Viewer.

Split Mode Selection Selects the type of split screen and specify the channel displayed in Display Pane.

Change Channel

CAPTURE

PRINT

AVI Save

Audio

OSD

PTZ

OSD Menu

Switches into previous/next channel or perform Auto Sequence.

Click Auto Sequence button to display the Time Interval Selection menu.

Saves current video for selected channel in designated path.

Prints current video image for selected channel through designated printer.

Records the live video in AVI file format in designated path, and then stops recording.

Recording status icon is displayed on screen during recording.

Sets the sound connected to each channel to ON/OFF.

Select the format of OSD information that will be displayed.

Controls connect PTZ camera(s).

Goes to the relevant menu screen of a camera, which supports OSD menu and changes the menu.

84_ web viewer

Menu

Display Pane

User ID, Logout

Functions

Displays the video of camera connected to DVR.

Displays the user's ID. Click Logout icon for logout.

OSD Information Display

The channel number of the connected DVR are displayed.

b Either the < DVR Time > or the < PC Time > will be displayed as the current date and time, according to your configuration.

c

It displays whether the PTZ controls are active.

Shows Audio On/Off status.

Motion icon appears when a motion is detected.

Tampering icon appears when a tampering is detected.

Shows the recording status.

M 

If you have set PTZ cameras for the DVR, “ PTZ ” is displayed on the screen. Select a PTZ camera channel and use the [ PTZ ] button for camera control.

c

Connected DVR

This displays the IP address and the status of the connecting

DVR.

M 

Connection failure message

No Response : Appears when the DVR does not respond.

Access Denied : Appears when the maximum number of users is exceeded.



The number of simultaneous connections are limited to 10.

Setting the Display of the OSD Time Information

Select < DVR Time > or < PC Time > for the OSD time information display setting.

1 DVR Time : Based on the time of the connected DVR

1 PC Time : Based on the time of the PC currently running the Web Viewer.

b

English _85

web viewer

Split-Screen

Click split mode selection button to switch to the corresponding screen mode.

SINGLE MODE QUAD MODE

To switch to full screen mode

Click < >.

Current split screen appears in full screen.

Press the [ ESC ] key to exit the full screen mode.

NINE MODE SIXTEEN MODE

86_ web viewer

Changing the Live Screen Mode



16-split mode does not support “ Sequence ”, “ Previous ” and “ Next ”.

1 : When this button is clicked, the previous screen appears.

- In SINGLE MODE, the channel numbers are switched in reverse order.

- In QUAD MODE, the screens are changed like 1st 4 channels (1~4) 2nd 4 channels (13~16)

3rd 4 channels (9~12) 4th 4 channels (5~8).

- In NINE MODE, the screens are changed from 9 channels (1~9) to 7 channels (10~16).

1 : When this button is clicked, the next screen appears.

- In SINGLE MODE, the channel numbers are sequentially switched from 1 to 16.

- In QUAD MODE, the screens are changed like 1st 4 channels (1~4) 2nd 4 channels (5~8)


- In NINE MODE, the screens are changed from 9 channels (1~9) to 7 channels (10~16).

1 : When this button is clicked, screens are switched at a preset interval.

- In SINGLE MODE, the channel numbers are sequentially switched from 1 to 16.

- In QUAD MODE, the screens are changed like

1st 4 channels (1~4) 2nd 4 channels (5~8)


- In NINE MODE, the screens are changed from 9 channels

(1~9) to 7 channels (10~16).



Default setting time (10 seconds)

To capture a screen

1. Click < > button.

When a pop-up window appears, select the saving path for captured image.

2. Select the path and name the file. And then click the < Save > button.

3. Save current camera’s video image as .bmp, .jpg or .png file.

J 

If the viewer is running without the administrator’s permission in

Windows Vista/7, you may not save the captured image as .

bmp, .jpg or .png file.

English _87

web viewer

To print a screen


2. Print current camera’s video image with the printer connected to the PC operating the Web Viewer.

To save as AVI


When “ AVI Setup ” window appears, select the record saving path and capacity.

2. Select a desired path, enter the maximum recording capacity, and then click < OK > button.



Save current channel’s video as AVI file. For playing a video clip, you can use the free video player to play the video.

(ex: GOM Player, KM Player, etc.)



After saving an AVI file, install the CODEC when playing it in Windows Media Player.



However, the video may not played properly, depending on the CODEC compliance of the player.

At least 1GB of free space is required for recording.

J 

While recording current data in Web Viewer, you cannot select Split Mode buttons, switch to the previous/next screen, or activate Auto Sequence function.



If the viewer is running without the administrator’s permission in Windows Vista / 7, you may not change a folder when saving a video as AVI file.

Audio

1 : Sets audio of each connected channel to On/Off.

OSD

1 : Select Show OSD on the Live screen.

88_ web viewer

CONTROLLING A CONNECTED PTZ CAMERA

Controlling PTZ

If PTZ camera is connected, the < > icon appears on screen. When selecting corresponding camera channel, the PTZ tab is provided to allow you to control the PTZ.

b

Part Names

Direction Adjustment b

PT Speed c

Preset

Swing

Group

Tour

Trace

PowerPTZ

Focus

IRIS

ZOOM c

Functions

Adjusts the direction of a camera.

Adjusts the PAN, TILT reaction speed.

Sets the preset position for camera framing and moves to designated preset position when selecting a desired preset.

Moves between the preset start point and end point.

Moves in the path specified by combining the preset, pattern and auto pan.

Moves in the path specified by combining multiple groups.

Moves camera’s framing in the predefined path.

Click or drag on the screen to control PTZ.

Adjusts the focus of the camera.

Adjusts image’s brightness by controling the camera’s iris.

Zooms in/out the image by controling camera’s zoom.

English _89

web viewer

To set a preset

1. Click < > button to display “ Preset ” window.

2. Click < > to select a desired preset number.

3. Enter the name of preset.

4. Use direction keys to adjust the direction which camera aims at.

5. Click the < RECORD > button.

To activate the preset

1. Click < > button to display “ Preset ” window.

2. Select a desired preset to activate from the list.

The camera’s framing moves to the preset position.

To activate Swing, Group, Tour and Trace

You can activate listed functions in the same manner as using a preset. For more information, refer to corresponding user manul of applicable camera.

M 

Only selective functions of the camera can be supported, depending on camera.

90_ web viewer

Controlling OSD Menu

If connected PTZ camera supports the OSD menu, press the < > to enter camera’s menu screen to change its settings.

b

Part Names

Direction Adjustment

ENTER b

Menu On/Off

Functions

You can go to a desired menu.

Selects a desired item.

You can On/Off camera’s OSD menu settings.

M 

For more information about camera’s OSD menu, refer to corresponding user manul of each camera.

English _91

web viewer

USING SEARCH VIEWER

The Search Viewer screen consists of following :



Up to 3 users can access simultaneously.

b c

Menu Functions

Menu Selection Switches to the corresponding menu screen by clicking each menu.

b

Address, Name, Time Displays the IP, model name, time, etc. of connected DVR.

c

Split Mode Selection Selects the type of split screen and selects the channel displayed in Display Pane.

CAPTURE Saves current video for selected channel in designated path.

PRINT

AVI Save


Records the live video in AVI file format in designated path, and then stops recording.

Recording status icon is displayed on screen during recording.

Audio

OSD

Calendar

Overlapped Data


Select the format of OSD information that will be displayed.

Displays the video-recorded date in blue and today in white. Click the date in blue color to display the recorded video information in timeline.

Displays and zooms in/out recorded video data. If overlapping data found, this function selects one of them to play.

92_ web viewer

Menu

Play Control

Recording Color

Display Pane

User ID, Logout

Functions

Adjusts current video’s playback speed and played time position.

Displays the corresponding color depending on recorded data type if you place your mouse cursor on that area.

Plays corresponding data on the screen if you select a search result.

Displays the user's ID. Click Logout icon for logout.

Searching the Recorded Video in the Calendar

Dates having recorded video are marked in blue.

Click a date marked blue to display video information on the timeline.

When you click < >, it will be synchronized with the system time (date) of the current PC.

To search by date

You can select the search date by using calendar.

1. Click < > or < > to select the year to search.

2. Click < > or < > to select the month to search.

The date including data appears in blue and today appears in red.

3. Click the date to search in calendar.

The first image of searched video data on the date is displayed on screen and the data is displayed in the timeline.

4. To search video data on today, click <

Today’s date is selected.

>.

To adjust timeline

If searched data are overlapping, you can select a desired data, move its playback time point, and zoom in/ out the timeline.

1. Select the number of data to search if data is overlapping.

It appears only when data are overlapped and assigns < 0 > to the most recent data.

2. Click your desired time point to play on the timeline.

The playback start point is moved.

3. Click < >, < > to zoom in/out the zoom factor to display time.

4. To show the previous/next timeline in zoomed-in status, click < > or < > to go to the left or right.

English _93

web viewer

Names and Functions of Play Buttons

Moves backward by 10 minutes from the current playing point.

b

Plays in reverse at doubled speed. The playback speed is doubled up to 64x speed.

b c c Moves backward by 1 second from current playing point.

Moves forward by 1 second from current playing point.

Plays at doubled speed. The playback speed is doubled up to 64x speed.

Moves forward by 10 minutes from the current playing point.

Moves to the recording start point on the corresponding timeline.

Plays in reverse.

Stops playing. When resuming playback, it is played from the recording start point.

Pauses playing. When resuming playback, it is played from the stopped point.

Plays normally.

Moves to the recording end point on the corresponding timeline.

94_ web viewer

VIEWER SETUP

You can configure the DVR settings remotely on the network.

To configure the DVR settings, click < Setup >.

System

You can configure the various settings of the DVR system.

Date/Time/Language

For more information, refer to < Date/Time/Language > in the < System Setup > menu. (Page 32 )

1. Select < Date/Time/Language > in the System menu.

2. Configure the DVR settings according to your system environment.

1 Date/Time

Set the date and time.

1 Time Synchronization Setup

Set the time synchronization.

1 Display

Date Format : Set the date type.

Time : Select a time format to display on the screen.

1 DST (Daylight Saving Time)

DST is displayed an hour ahead of the standard time of the time zone.

1 Language

Select a preferred language for the DVR.

English _95

web viewer

Holiday

You can set specific dates to Holidays according to your preferences.

For more information, refer to < Setting Holiday > in the < System

Setup > menu. (Page 32 )

Permission Management

For more information, refer to < Permission Management > in the < System Setup > menu. (Page 35 )

1 Admin

You can change the admin ID or the password.



You can type the ID with alphanumeric characters only.



For the password, use alphabets and special characters excluding < \ > and

< " >.

1 Group

Users are classified into groups and the permission can be set according to the group.



First of all, add a group.

96_ web viewer

1 User

You can add, change or remove a user or users.

1 Setup

You can set the user permission.

System Management

For more information, refer to < System Management > in the < System Setup > menu. (Page 40 )

1 System Information

You can see information of the current system.

Check the Software Version , Broadcast Format, MAC Address, DVR name and S/W Upgrade.

English _97

web viewer

Device

You can check a list of devices that are connected to the DVR and configure the necessary settings.

Click < Device > in the menu screen.

For more information, refer to “ Setting the Device ”. (Page 44 )

Camera

1 Camera

You can configure the settings of the camera that is connected to the

DVR.

1 Privacy Region

You can specify a certain area of the camera video to be protected for your privacy.

1 PTZ

You can configure the settings of the PTZ camera that is connected to the DVR.

Set the ID and protocol.

98_ web viewer

Storage Device

You can check and change the settings of the storage device.

1 Device

You will see a list of storage devices that are connected to the DVR.

You can check the type, used/total, usage and status of the device.

1 HDD Alarm

You can set the alarm output channel and the alarm duration for an error.

Remote Device

You can see a list of remote devices including PTZ cameras that are connected to the RS-485 port of the DVR and configure the necessary settings.

English _99

web viewer

Monitor

1 Monitor

You can configure the monitoring screen settings and set the output system.

1 Mode

You can switch between live mode and play mode.

100_ web viewer

Record

For more information, refer to < Setting the Recording >. (Page 53 )

Recording Schedule

If you set a recording schedule for a specific date and time, the recording will start at that specific time.

- Apply to All CH : Click < Apply to All CH > to display the confirmation window.


You can set the start and end times of recording that will be activated if an event occurs.

English _101

web viewer

REC Quality & Resolution

1 Standard/Event

You can set the resolution, frame rate and recording quality for each channel.

Record Option

You can set the Disk End Mode.

Event

For more information, refer to < Setting the Event >. (Page 56 )

Motion Detection

You can set the motion detection mode and the sensitivity as well as the alarm output type and the duration.

102_ web viewer

1 Motion Region

Set the target motion detection area.


You can set the alarm output time if a video loss occurs.

Tampering Detection

You can set whether to generate alarm and its dwell time for video tampering events.

English _103

web viewer

Alarm Schedule

You can schedule the alarm output according to the day of the week and the time.

The default setting is Event Sync, which activates the alarm only if an event occurs.

Network

For more information, refer to < Network Configuration >. (Page 60 )

Connection Mode

A remote user can access the DVR via the network to check the current mode and the IP address.

1 Interface

You can set the network connection route.

1 Port

You can configure the protocol related settings.

104_ web viewer

DDNS

You can check the DDNS settings.

Live Transfer

Sets the quality of the image that is transferred from the DVR to the network.

1 Live Transfer

A remote user can set the image resolution of the transferred data.

Mailing Service

You can specify the SMTP server that sends a mail if an event occurs and set the recipient group and users.

1 SMTP

You can set the server that sends mails and specify if you use the authentication process.

1 Event

You can set the event interval and specify which events the server sends mails for.

English _105

web viewer

1 Group

You can add a group to receive the mail if an event occurs and set the permission to receive the event mail for each group.

1 Recipient

You can add a user or users who will receive the mail.

ABOUT

Click < About >.

Displays the model name of connected DVR and the version of Web Viewer.

106_ web viewer

CONNECTING WEB VIEWER (Mac)

Safari on MAC.

If you want to use DVR Web Viewer with Safari Browser on a Mac, please refer to this user guide and install

Multi Viewer with firmware upgrade if necessary.

1 Mac OS versions available : 10.6 or later version

1 Silverlight : 5 or later

1 Safari : 5 or later

1. Click [ Click now to Install ] to display the installation screen as shown.

2. Double-click the [ Silverlight.pkg

] icon to display the

Silverlight plug-in installation screen as shown.

3. Click [ Continue ] to start installing Silverlight plug-in.

When done, you will see the screen as below.

4. Click [ Close ] to exit from the Silverlight plug-in installation screen.

English _107

web viewer

1 If Microsoft Silverlight plug-in is already installed

1. Use a web browser to connect to the DVR.

2. If Silverlight plug-in is already installed, you will see the login screen as shown.

3. If the login screen does not appear, check if the DVR set is connected properly with a valid IP address.

M 

If automatic proxy is activated and an invalid DNS server is specified while configuring network, the Internet access may not be available.



For more details on using the Web Viewer, please refer to “ Connecting Web Viewer (Windows) ”. (Page 84)

1 If you use Safari version 7.0 or later, the silver light plugin usage will be restricted and won’t function properly due to Safari security policy. The settings for enabling the web viewer are as follows:

1. Safari settings – Security tab- Move to the internet plugin

2. Select “Turn off safety mode” by clicking the selection button on the right of the DVR address being accessed.

3. Click the “Trust” button in the confirmation window.

4. Click the button on the right of the DVR address, set to "always allows".

5. Save the settings by clicking the “Finish” button.

108_ web viewer

USING LIVE VIEWER (Mac)

The Live Viewer screen consists of following : c b

Menu

Name, Address b

Menu Selection c

Split Mode Selection

Name, Address

Audio

DVR Tim, PC Time

Change Channel

CAPTURE

PRINT

RECORD

Channel

PTZ

Display Pane

Functions

Displays a connected DVR’s IP address and model name.

Consists of < LIVE > ,< ABOUT > and < LOGOUT > menu.

These buttons are used for the screen split and full screen mode.



Supports up to a maximum of 9 channels due to performance constraints of Silverlight.

Displays a connected DVR’s IP address and model name.


Select < DVR Time > or < PC Time > for the OSD time information display setting of the Live

Viewer.

Switches into previous/next channel or perform Auto Sequence.

Click Auto Sequence button to display the Time Interval Selection menu.

Saves current video for selected channel in designated path.


Starts and stops recording.

If you cannot play the file recorded from the web, please install the H.264 CODEC. ex) MAC: perian_1.2.3.dmg (http://perian.org)

Indicates connected DVR's channels.

Controls connect PTZ camera(s).

Displays the video of camera connected to DVR.

English _109

web viewer

MOBILE VIEWER

What is Mobile Viewer?

Mobile Viewer is management software that enables you to connect to DVR (Digital Video Recorder) remotely and control the video playback and PTZ operations (if configured) in real time.

Key Features

1 Remote access via Smart phone

1 Voice Recognition

1 1-split and 4-split modes supported in Live Viewer

1 Supports single channel search function

1 Switch channels using the touch-sensitive LCD panel

1 PTZ camera operations supported

(complies with the protocol of the connected DVR)

1 Up to 16 channels supported

Compatible Smartphone

This application is optimized for

1 iOS v5.1, v6.0, v6.1 (iPhone 4/5, iPad 3/4)

1 Android OS v2.3, v4.0, v4.1 (Galaxy S2/S3, Galaxy Note)

M 

For more information, refer to the user manual.

(http://www.samsungcctv.com)

2.X

20xx. xx. xx

110_ web viewer

backup viewer

SEC BACKUP VIEWER

You can play a file that is backed up in the format of SEC.

Backup in SEC format produces backup data file, library file and self-executable viewer file.

If you run the backup file viewer, the backup data file will be automatically played.

b c

SDR-5102_CAM 01

Recommended System Requirements

PCs with a lower specification than the recommended below may not fully support forward/backward and high-speed playback.

1 OS : Windows XP professional, Windows Vista, Windows 7

1 CPU : Intel i5 2.8GHz or faster

1 RAM : DDR PC-3200 1G or more

1 VGA : Geforce 6200 or higher

English _111

backup viewer

Part Names Functions

Set the screen’s aspect ratio to be displayed.

Split Screen

The screen switches to the selected split screen mode.

b

Screen Printout c

Audio

Watermark

Deinterlace

Show OSD

Enlarge /

Reduce Timeline

Restore Timeline

/

/

Display of storage time range

Playback Control

Saves the current video’s image as in an image file. Supports jpeg file format.

Prints out the current screen. You should have installed the appropriate printer driver before you can print out the screen.

A toggle button. Each time you press this button, the audio output will toggle between activated and deactivated.

You can adjust the volume level from 0 to 100.

Press the button to enable file tampering detection, to detect data file forging.

You can enable the De-interlace function.

Check the OSD checkbox to display the OSD information on the backup playback screen.

Information such as backup date, day of the week, time, model name, and channel number will be displayed on the screen.

Collapses the time range that is displayed on the range bar of the storage time. You can collapse the range bar until the overall range is shortened to

24 hours.

Enlarges the time range that is displayed on the range bar of the storage time. You can enlarge the range bar until the overall range is extended to

1 minute.

Restores the timeline to the default.

Displays the time range of a stored video file.

You can move the gridline of the range bar to select a time point to play.

You can adjust the video playback of the timeline.

M 

If it has a high recording rate and is played at high speed playback of 16x or higher speed in the backup viewer, actual playback speed may not reach the set playback speed.

112_ backup viewer

appendix

PRODUCT SPECIFICATION (CAMERA)

SDC-7340BC

Item

SDC-7340BCN

Electrical

Input Voltage

Power Consumption

Video

Imaging Device

Active Pixels

1/3'' CMOS

976 x 496

Scanning System Interlace

Synchronization

Frequency

Internal

H: 15,734 Hz, V: 59.94 Hz

Horizontal Resolution 720TVL

Min. Illumination OLux (IR-LED)

S/N Ratio (Y Signal) 50dB

Lens

Focus Length

Max.Aperture Ratio

3.6mm

2

D: 72˚

Angular Field of View H: 60˚

V: 48˚

Details

DC 12V

Operational

Shutter Mode

Gain Control

White Balance

Environmental

Operating Temperature/

Humidity

IP Grade

Auto (Rolling Shutter)

Auto

Auto (1800°K~10500°K)

Digital Noise Reduction Auto

Day & Night MECHA IR CUT FILTER

IR Distance 25m (850nm/27EA)

-10°C ~ +50°C (+14°F ~ +122°F) / 20% ~ 85% RH

IP66

Mechanical

Dimension (W X H X D) W64 X H72 X D192.5 mm (2.52 X 2.83 X 7.58 inch)

Weight 252g

3W

SDC-7340BCP

H: 15,625 Hz, V: 50 Hz

700TVL

English _113

appendix

PRODUCT SPECIFICATION (DVR)

Video

Live

Details

Item

SDR-5102 SDR-4102

Inputs 16(8) composite video 0.5–1 Vpp, 75 ohm

Resolution 960x480 NTSC, 960x576 PAL / 720

Frame rate 480fps NTSC, 400fps PAL

Resolution 960x480 NTSC, 960x576 PAL

Multi Screen display 1/4/7/9/13/16/16(A)/Sequence/ PIP x480 NTSC, 720 x576 PAL

240fps NTSC, 200fps PAL

1/4/7/9/13/Sequence/ PIP

Performance

OS

Recording

Embedded

Compression

Record Rate

Mode

Event

Overwrite modes

Pre Event

POST Event

Search mode

Search & Playback

Playback function

Linux

H.264

y SDR-5102

NTSC : Up to 480fps @ 960x480 / PAL : Up to 400fps @ 960x576



NTSC : Up to 480fps @ 352x240 / PAL : Up to 400fps @ 352x288 y SDR-4102





NTSC : Manual, Schedule (Continuous / Event), Event(Pre / Post), Time Laps(1~30fps)

PAL : Manual, Schedule (Continuous / Event), Event(Pre / Post), Time Laps(1~25fps)

Video Loss, Motion(Level 1~10), Tampering

Stop/Continuous

Off/5 sec

Up to 6 hour (Off, 5, 10, 20, 30 sec, 1, 3, 5, 10, 20 min, 1, 2, 3, 4 ,5, 6 hour)

Date/time, Event, Back up, Motio n

Fast Forward/Backward, Slow Forward/Backward, Step Forward/Backward

※

Backward Play with I-frame Only

114_ appendix

Network (IPv4)

Smart phone

Storage

Security

Details

Item

SDR-5102 SDR-4102

Transmission speed

Bandwidth

960H/4CIF/2CIF/CIF(480fps NTSC,

400fps PAL)

Up to (32)Mbps, Unlimited(32M)/2/1.5/

1 Mbps/800/600/500/400/300/200/

100/50 kbps

960H/4CIF/2CIF/CIF(240fps NTSC,

200fps PAL)

Up to (16)Mbps, Unlimited(16M)/2/1.5/

1 Mbps/800/600/500/400/300/200/

100/50 kbps

Bandwidth control Automatic

Stream H.264(4CIF/2CIF/CIF Selectable)

Remote users

Maximum

Protocol support

10 Persons (Search up to (3), Live Unicast/Live Multicast available)

TCP/IP,UDP,DHCP,PPPoE,SMTP,NTP,HTTP,DDNS,RTP,RTSP

Monitoring

Smart Phone

Smart viewer,Webviewer, Mobile Viewer

Android OS v.2.3.5, v4.0.3, v4.1.2

iOS OS v5.1.1, v6.0, v6.0.2, v6.1

RTP, RTSP, HTTP, CGI Protocol support

Remote users

Maximum

Internal HDD

External (e-SATA

Interface)

USB (Back-up)

Live(1)

1 SATA HDD

1 e-SATA I/F

2 USB Ports ( 1 front / 1 Back )

File Format

(Back-up)

BU(DVR Player), EXE(Include Player) , AVI

Password Protection 1 Admin, 10 Group , 10 User per 1 Group

Data Authentication Watermark

Interface

Monitors

VGA

HDMI

Main Composite

Spot Composite

1 VGA (1280x720, 1280x1024, 1920x1080)

1 HDMI (1280x720, 1280x1024, 1920x1080)

–

–

Loop Outputs –

Simulatneous Output VGA and HDMI

English _115

appendix

Audio

Alarm

Connections

Details

Item

SDR-5102 SDR-4102

Inputs / Output

Compression

Audio input : 4 channels / Output : 1 channel

G.711

Inputs / Output -

Remote notification Notification via e-mail

Ethernet

Serial interface

1 RJ45 10/100 Base-T

RS-485(Half Duplex) for PTZ

USB USB 2.0, 2 ports (Front/Rear) e-SATA 1 External SATA port

Application Supoort Mouse, Remote Controller

Protocol support

Coax

Samsung-E/Samsung-T/Pelco-D/Pelco-p/Panasonic/ Phillips/ AD/ VICON//GE

Pelco-C, CCVC -

General

Electrical

Environmental

Mechanical

Lauguage

Input Voltage /Current 12V DC Adaptor, 100~240V AC, 50/60Hz

Power consumption Max. 36 W (with 1x HDD)

Operating

Temperature /

Humidity

Dimension (W x H x D)

H (leg not included)

W315 x H52 x D235 mm (12.4" x 2.05" x9.25")

Weight

(With hard disks)

+0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F) / 20% to 85% RH

1.70 kg (3.75 lb) 1.56 kg (3.44 lb)

Korean, Japanese, Chinese (Simplified), English, French, German, Spanish, Italian,

Russian, Polish, Czech, Turkish, Netherlands, Portuguese,Swedish, Danish,

Thailandais, Rumania, Serbia, Croatia, Hungary, Greek, Chinese (Traditional),

Finnish, Norwegian ( 25 Language)

116_ appendix

PRODUCT SPECIFICATION (DVR)

Video

Live

Item

Details

SDR-3102

Inputs 4 composite video 0.5–1 Vpp, 75 ohm automatic termination

Resolution 960x480 NTSC, 960x576 PAL /

Frame rate 120fps NTSC, 100fps PAL

Resolution 960x480 NTSC, 960x576 PAL

Multi Screen display 1 / 4 / PIP / Sequence

720 x480 NTSC, 720 x576 PAL

Performance

OS

Recording

Search & Playback

Network (IPv4)

Embedded

Compression

Record Rate

Mode

Event

Overwrite modes

Pre Event

Linux

H.264

NTSC: Up to 120fps @ 960x480 / PAL: Up to 100fps @ 960x576




NTSC : Manual, Schedule (Continuous / Event), Event(Pre / Post), Time lapse (1~30fps)

PAL : Manual, Schedule (Continuous / Event), Event(Pre / Post), Time lapse (1~25fps)

Video Loss, Motion(Level 1~10), Tampering

Stop/Continuous

Off, 5 Sec

POST Event

Search mode

Playback function

Up to 6 hour (Off, 5, 10, 20, 30 sec, 1, 3, 5, 10, 20 min, 1, 2, 3, 4 ,5, 6 hour)

Date/time, Event, Back up, Motion ( ※ All Search Included Prview Function)

Fast Forward/Backward, Slow Forward/Backward, Step Forward/Backward

Transmission speed 960H/4CIF/2CIF/CIF(120fps NTSC, 100fps PAL)

Bandwidth

Up to (8)Mbps, Unlimited(8M)/2/1.5/1 Mbps/800/600/500/400/300/200/100/50 kbps

Bandwidth control Automatic

Stream H.264(4CIF/2CIF/CIF Selectable)

Remote users

Maximum

10 Persons (Search up to (3), Live Unicast/Live Multicast available)

Protocol support

Monitoring

TCP/IP,UDP,DHCP,PPPoE,SMTP,NTP,HTTP,DDNS,RTP,RTSP

Smart viewer,Webviewer, Mobile Viewer

English _117

appendix

Smart phone

Storage

Security

Item

Details

SDR-3102

Smart Phone

Android OS v.2.3.5, v4.0.3, v4.1.2

iOS OS v5.1.1, v6.0, v6.0.2, v6.1

RTP, RTSP, HTTP, CGI Protocol support

Remote users

Maximum

Internal HDD

External (e-SATA

Interface)

Live(1)

1 SATA HDD

1 e-SATA I/F

USB (Back-up)

File Format

(Back-up)

2 USB Ports ( 1 front / 1 Back )

BU(DVR Player), EXE(Include Player) , AVI

Password Protection 1 Admin, 10 Group , 10 User per 1 Group

Data Authentication Watermark

Interface

Monitors

Audio

Alarm

Connections

VGA

HDMI

Main Composite

Spot Composite

–

–

1 VGA (1280x720, 1280x1024, 1920x1080)

1 HDMI (1280x720, 1280x1024, 1920x1080)

Loop Outputs –

Simulatneous Output VGA and HDMI

Inputs / Output

Compression

4CH line in/ 1CH line out

G.711

Inputs / Output –

Remote notification Notification via e-mail

Ethernet

Serial interface

1 RJ45 10/100 Base-T

RS-485 for PTZ

USB e-SATA

USB 2.0, 2 ports (Front/Rear)

1 External SATA port

Application Supoort Mouse, Remote Controller

Protocol support Samsung-E/Samsung-T/Pelco-D/Pelco-p/Panasonic/ Phillips/ AD/ VICON//GE

COAX –

118_ appendix

Item

Details

SDR-3102

General

Electrical

Environmental

Mechanical

Lauguage

Input Voltage / Current 12V DC Adaptor, 100~240V AC, 50/60Hz

Power consumption Max. 10W (With 1x HDD)

Operating

Temperature /

Humidity

Weight

(With hard disks)

+0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F) / 20% to 85% RH

Dimension (W x H x D)

H (leg not included)

W315 x H52 x D235 mm (12.4" x 2.05" x9.25")

1.53 kg (3.37 lb)

Korean, Japanese, Chinese (Simplified), English, French, German, Spanish, Italian,

Russian, Polish, Czech, Turkish, Netherlands, Portuguese,Swedish, Danish,

Thailandais, Rumania, Serbia, Croatia, Hungary, Greek, Chinese (Traditional),

Finnish, Norwegian ( 25 Language)

English _119

appendix

PRODUCT OVERVIEW

1 SDR-5102 unit : mm (inches)

120_ appendix

315 (12.4’’)


315 (12.4’’)

English _121

appendix


122_ appendix

315 (12.4’’)

DEFAULT SETTING

This returns the factory default settings.

The settings are made as follows;

1 Use System/Load Factory Default in MENU



The default settings are based on SDR-5102 .



The initial administrator ID is “admin” and the password should be set when logging in for the first time. Please change your password every three months to safely protect personal information and to prevent the damage of the information theft.

Please, take note that it’s a user’s responsibility for the security and any other problems caused by mismanaging a password

Category

System Settings

Device

Details

Date/Time/Language Date/Time/Language

Permission

Management

System Management

Camera

Storage Device

Admin

User

Setting

System Information

Camera

PTZ

Screen Setup

HDD Alarm

Date

Time Format

Time Zone

Time Synchronize

DST

Language

ID

Group

Restricted Access

Auto Logout

Manual Input of ID

Broadcast Format

Video

Audio

CH Name

SEQ-Dwell Time

ID

Protocol

Brightness

Contrast

Color

Check Alarm Output Port

Duration

Replace Alarm Output Port

Duration

Factory Default

YYYY-MM-DD

24 hours

GMT

OFF

OFF

English admin

All Group

Search/Backup

OFF

OFF

NTSC/PAL

ON

OFF

CAM 01 ~ CAM 16

5 sec

Camera No.

None

50

50

50

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

English _123

appendix

Category

Device

Recording

Event

Remote Device

Monitor

Recording Schedule


REC Quality/Resolution

Record Option

Motion Detection


Tampering Detection

Alarm Schedule

Disk End Mode

Auto Delete

Mode

Sensitivity

Alarm

Duration

Motion Region

Video Loss State

Alarm

Duration

Mode

Sensitivity

Alarm

Duration

BEEP

Details

Baudrate

Parity

Data

Stop bit

Remote Control

Monitor

Mode

CH1~CH16

PRE Event

POST Event

Normal Recording

Event

Event Display

Display

Multi CH SEQ Time

VGA/HDMI

HDMI Resolution Auto Detection

Live Screen

Play Screen

Resolution

Frame Rate

Record Quality

Resolution

Frame Rate

Record Quality

Setup

Disk End Beep

Factory Default

OFF

1 min

CIF

NTSC: 7 fps

PAL: 5fps

Level 4

4CIF

NTSC: 7 fps

PAL: 5fps

Level 4

Overwrite

OFF

OFF

OFF

Level10(high)

None

10 sec

All Area

9600

None

8

1

ON( 0 )

OFF

All

5 sec

1280X1024

ON

ALL

ALL

Both(Cont&Evnt)

OFF

None

10 sec

OFF

Medium

None

10 sec

Event Sync

124_ appendix

Category

Network

Connection Mode

DDNS

Live Transfer

Mailing Service

Details

Interface

Port

DDNS Site

Resolution

Quality

SMTP

Event

Group

IP Type

Transfer Bandwidth

IP Address

Gateway

Subnet Mask

DNS

Protocol Type

Device Port

HTTP Port

Secure Video Transmission

Server

Port

Use Authentication

Secure Transfer

Event Interval

Use Event Transfer

Group

Recipient Permission

Factory Default

Static

2Mbps

192.168.1.200

192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

168.126.63.1

TCP

4520~4524

80

OFF

OFF

CIF

Low

OFF

25

OFF

Never

10 min

OFF

OFF

OFF

English _125

appendix

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Countermeasures

The system does not turn on and the indicator on the front panel does not work at all.

y Check if the power supply system is properly connected.

y Check the system for the input voltage from the power source.

y If the problem persists even after you have taken the above actions, check the power supplier and replace it with a new one if neccessary.

Some channels display just a black screen even if they receive video sources.

If I press the [

The Channel button does not work on the Live screen.

REC ] button, the REC indicator does not flash, nor the player start recording.

The screen displays the logo image repeatedly.

y Check if the camera connected to the system properly displays the image. Sometimes, this problem may occur on a camera that is not properly connected to the video source.

y Check if the camera is properly supplied with power.

y Sometimes, this problem may occur on a channel with weak video signal from a video distributor that is connected to multiple systems. In this case, input the video source of the camera directly into the DVR.

This may find the cause and solve the problem.

y Check if there is a free space on the HDD for the recording.

y Check if the record mode is set to ON in the record mode setting.

y This may occur from a problem with the main board, or the related software is corrupt.

Contact the nearest service center for more information.

y The Channel button does not work if the current screen is in the event monitoring mode.

In the event monitoring screen, press the [ ALARM ] button to exit the screen and select a channel.

The cursor will not move to the Start button when I start the calendar search.

When the alarm sounds, I press the [ ALARM ] button to release the alarm but it does not work. The alarm persists and I could not set it off in any way.

y Check if the channel and the date that you want to play are marked with the V symbol.

Both channel and date should be checked before you can start playing with the Start button.

y Press the [ MENU ] button to release the alarm in the following way:

1) To release the event monitoring mode : Monitoring Mode – set the duration of the event monitoring to Off.

2) To release the alarm sound : Event Record Mode - Alarm (Motion

Detection/Video Loss/Tampering Detection) – deactivate the alarm sound.

3) To release the event : Event Record Mode - Alarm (Motion Detection/

Video Loss/Tampering Detection) – set the mode to Off.

No response is made even if I press the [ PTZ ] button on the Live screen.

y Menu Camera Check if the current protocols and other settings in the PTZ device are properly configured according to the PTZ camera.

I've found that the DVR does not recognize as many disks as installed when I have connected multiple external HDDs to the DVR.

y It takes time for the DVR to recognize multiple external HDDs. Try again in a moment and if the problem (of failure to recognize as many HDDs as connected) persists, it may occur due to a mechanical error of the

HDD installed. Try again with a different HDD.

126_ appendix

Symptom

A message of “Need to reset date/time.” Is displayed on the screen.

y This message is displayed if there occurs a problem with the time setting of the internal clock or an error in the clock itself.

Contact the retailer or the service center for more information.

The time bar is not displayed in Search mode.

y The timeline can switch between normal and extension mode.

In extension mode, the time bar may not be displayed in the current timeline. Switch to normal mode or use the left or right button to navigate through the time bar.

The “NO HDD” icon and an error message are displayed.

I have installed an additional HDD on the DVR but it does not recognize the HDD.

y Check the HDD for connection. If the problem persists in a normal condition, contact the nearest service center to have the HDD checked by the service personnel.

y See the compatibilty list to check if the additional HDD is supported by the DVR. For the compatibility list, contact the retailer where you purchased the DVR.

I have connected an external storage device (external

SATA HDD) to the DVR but the DVR seems not to recognize it.

y See the compatibility list of external storage devices to check if the connected device is supported by the DVR.

For the compatibility list, contact the retailer where you purchased the

DVR.

If I press the ESC key in full screen mode of the

WebViewer, the system does not switch to a normal split mode.

I found it difficult to configure the network settings if using the default search, backup and router settings.

y y y

Press the ALT+TAB keys to select ‘ACTIVE MOVIE’ and press the ESC key again. The system will switch to a normal split mode.

For more information, refer to the user manual.

If you want to check the basics of the product for a quick start, refer to the quick start guide (backup, search).

y If you use the router for network connection, refer to the “ Connecting to the Internet using the router ” section in this manual.

I forgot the password.

Backup data is just not played by the PC or DVR.

y Contact the DVR administrator for help.

y When you are backing up data, you have choices about the player either: PC or DVR. Make your selection before proceeding.

y If you are using the PC to play the data, the format of the backup file should be either SEC.

y If you are using the DVR for this purpose, formatting backup files should be done by the DVR.

My player does not switch to Live mode while in playback.

Countermeasures y Press the Stop [ @ ] button on the remote control, or click the [ icon on the launcher to switch to Live mode.

]

English _127

appendix

Symptom

Recording does not work.

The image quality of the recording data is not good.

Countermeasures y If your player does not display a Live image at all, that indicates recording does not work so first check if you see an image on the screen.

y Recording does not work if the recording settings are not properly configured.

1) Manual Record: Press the [ REC ] button on the remote control to start recording.

2) Scheduled Record: Specify a desired time in Menu – Record –

Recording Schedule. Recording will start at the specified time.

< Continuous > Record: Recording will proceed in any conditions at the specified time.

< Event > Record: When an event occurs, recording will perform only if the event is of alarm, motion detectio n, v ideo loss and

Tampering Detection .

If there is no event found, recording will not perform.

< Continuous / Event > Record: If there is no event found,

Continuous recording will perform. Whereas, if an event occurs,

Event recording will perform.

y Increase the resolution and quality level in Menu – Record – Quality /

Resolution.

1) Resolution: Select a bigger size when specifying the recording size.

( WD1> 4CIF>2CIF>CIF)

The recording image in the CIF format shows a deteriorated quality as it is enlarged from a small-sized image.

2) Record Quality: Specify a bigger level for the recording quality.

y If you increase the resolution and the recording quality, the data size increases accordingly. So the HDD will be filled faster. Overwriting will overwrite the existing data so recording will proceed at a shorter interval.

128_ appendix

OPEN SOURCE ANNOUNCEMENT

The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the GPL/LGPL. You may obtain the complete

Corresponding Source code from us for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product by sending email to [email protected]

If you want to obtain the complete Corresponding Source code in the physical medium such as CD-ROM, the cost of physically performing source distribution might be charged.

1 GPL Software : linux kernel, Sysvinit, dosfstools, wget, msmtp, busybox, cdrtools, dvd+rw-tools, iconv, smartctl, uboot, minicom, openssl, bash, lm_sensors, parted, procps, util-linux 2.19.1, xfsprogs 3.1.7

1 LGPL Software : glibc, vmstat, inetutils, calendarview.js, libiconv

1 OpenSSL License : OpenSSL

1 Boost Software License: Boost-1.43.0 (http://www.boost.org/)

1 COMMON DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION LICENSE: cdrtools 2.01.01

1 FreeType Project LICENSE: freetype2

1 RSA MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm License : MD5 Message Digest Code

1 MIT License : JQuery, Prototype JavaScript framework, FJCore

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2, June 1991

Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA

Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public

License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other

Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser

General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.

Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with two steps:

(1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.

Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.

Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.

We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,

DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

Version 2, June 1991


51 Franklin S

0.

This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language.

(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term

“modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program

(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.

1.

You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.

whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.

when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.

(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the

Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this

License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the

Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3.

You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of

Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: source code, which must be distributed under the terms of

Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machinereadable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,

distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)

The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the

Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the

Program or works based on it.

6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the

Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.

7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free

Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free

Software Foundation.

10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free

Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE,

THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT

PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE

STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER

PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF

THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE

DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY

SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR

AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY

OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE

PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR

DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR

INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR

LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF

THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN

IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.

To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the

“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does.

Copyright (C) yyyy name of author

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the

Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but

WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,

Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author

Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.

The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and

‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program

‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James

Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This

General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may

consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General

Public License instead of this License.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 3, 29 June 2007

Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>


Preamble

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.

The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the

GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.

Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:

(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions.

Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.

Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.

Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.

States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

0. Definitions.

“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.

“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this

License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and

“recipients” may be individuals or organizations.

To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.

A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.

To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other activities as well.

To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.

An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that

(1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.

1. Source Code.

The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form of a work.

A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language.

The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major

Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that

Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Major

Component”, in this context, means a major essential component

(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.

The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s System

Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work.

The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.

The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.

2. Basic Permissions.

All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.

You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.

Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 makes it unnecessary.

3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures.

When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.

You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.

You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: it, and giving a relevant date. under this License and any conditions added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.

Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.

A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an

“aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.

You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable

Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:

(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the

Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.

(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with subsection 6b. place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the

Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the

Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding

Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding

Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d.

A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be included in conveying the object code work.

A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.

“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.

If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User

Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term

(regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding

Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the

Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.

Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.

Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

7. Additional Terms.

“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this

License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.

Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions.

When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of it.

(Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: sections 15 and 16 of this License; or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal

Notices displayed by works containing it; or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or authors of the material; or trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.

All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but

permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.

If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.

Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.

8. Termination.

You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this

License (including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11).

However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.

Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10.

9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this

License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.

10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.

You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the

Program or any portion of it.

11. Patents.

A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this

License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.

A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this

License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this definition,

“control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License.

Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.

In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.

If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid.

If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.

Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.

12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.

If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this

License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the

Program.

13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this

License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such.

14. Revised Versions of this License.

The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public

License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the

Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public

License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free


If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions.

However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.

15. Disclaimer of Warranty.

THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT

PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE

STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER

PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT


MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF

THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE

DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY

SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16. Limitation of Liability.

IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR


OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM

AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR


INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED

TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR


THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN

IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE


17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.


GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 2.1, February 1999


51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA


[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL.

It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]

Preamble

The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users.

This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free

Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.

When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.

To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.

For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.

We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.

To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.

Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.

Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary

GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General

Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.

When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General

Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public

License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.

We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does

Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public

License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.

For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.

In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.

Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.

The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a

“work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,

DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION

0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.

A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs

(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.

The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.)

“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.

Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the

Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).

Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.

1.

You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.

You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.

2.

You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. to all third parties under the terms of this License. data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.

(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application.

Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)

These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.

Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.

In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.

3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public

License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this

License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General

Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.

Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.

This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the

Library into a program that is not a library.

4.

You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.

If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.

5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.

However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.

When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.

Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.

If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under

Section 6.)

Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.

6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.

You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the

Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this

License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections

1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the

Library, with the complete machine readable “work that uses the

Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)

A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection

6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. or that you have already sent this user a copy.

For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.

It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.

7.

You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities.

This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.

of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.

8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the

Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.

9.

You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your

acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.

10.

Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the

Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.

11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.

If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.

It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.

This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.

12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.

13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free

Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free


14.

If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free

Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.

NO WARRANTY

15.

BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE

IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED

BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN

WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES

PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO

THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.

SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE

COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

16.

IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR


OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE

LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR

DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR


INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR


THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF

SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE



How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries

If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).

To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the

“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it does.

Copyright (C) year name of author

This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT

ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public

License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software

Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-

1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.

You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:

Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library

‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.

signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice.

OpenSSL LICENSE

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1.

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2.

Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3.

All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”

4.

The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].

5.

Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6.

Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.

org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ‘‘AS IS’’

AND ANY EXPRESSED OR

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric

Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by

Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young

([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform

with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the

RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.

com).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation

(online or textual) provided with the package.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1.

Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2.


3.

All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4.

If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim

Hudson ([email protected])”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ‘‘AS IS’’ AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN

NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS

OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGE.The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.

Boost Software License

Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, 2003 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following : The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF

ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO

THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE

DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR

OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,

ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE

OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

COMMON DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION

LICENSE Version 1.0

1. Definitions.

1.1.

“Contributor” means each individual or entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.

1.2.

“Contributor Version” means the combination of the Original

Software, prior Modifications used by a Contributor (if any), and the

Modifications made by that particular Contributor.

1.3.

“Covered Software” means (a) the Original Software, or (b)

Modifications, or (c) the combination of files containing Original Software with files containing Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.

1.4.

“Executable” means the Covered Software in any form other than

Source Code.

1.5.

“Initial Developer” means the individual or entity that first makes

Original Software available under this License.

1.6. “Larger Work” means a work which combines Covered Software or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License.

1.7.

“License” means this document.

1.8. “Licensable” means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.

1.9.

“Modifications” means the Source Code and Executable form of any of the following:

A. Any file that results from an addition to, deletion from or modification of the contents of a file containing Original Software or previous Modifications;

B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Software or previous Modifications; or

C. Any new file that is contributed or otherwise made available under the terms of this License.

1.10.

“Original Software” means the Source Code and Executable form of computer software code that is originally released under this License.

1.11.

“Patent Claims” means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.

1.12. “Source Code” means (a) the common form of computer software code in which modifications are made and (b) associated documentation included in or with such code.

1.13.

“You” (or “Your”) means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License. For legal entities, “You” includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition,

“control” means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

2. License Grants.

2.1.

The Initial Developer Grant.

Conditioned upon Your compliance with Section 3.1 below and subject to third party intellectual property claims, the Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license: a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark)

Licensable by Initial Developer, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Software (or portions thereof), with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a

Larger Work; and b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of

Original Software, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Software (or portions thereof).

c) The licenses granted in Sections 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes or otherwise makes the

Original Software available to a third party under the terms of this

License.

d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: (1) for code that You delete from the Original Software, or

(2) for infringements caused by: (i) the modification of the Original

Software, or (ii) the combination of the Original Software with other software or devices.

2.2.

Contributor Grant.

Conditioned upon Your compliance with Section 3.1 below and subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license: a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark)

Licensable by Contributor to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof), either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Software and/or as part of a Larger Work; and

b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of

Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: (1) Modifications made by that Contributor

(or portions thereof); and (2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).

c) The licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first distributes or otherwise makes the

Modifications available to a third party.

d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: (1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the

Contributor Version; (2) for infringements caused by: (i) third party modifications of Contributor Version, or (ii) the combination of

Modifications made by that Contributor with other software

(except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or (3) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Software in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.

3. Distribution Obligations.

3.1.

Availability of Source Code.

Any Covered Software that You distribute or otherwise make available in

Executable form must also be made available in Source Code form and that Source Code form must be distributed only under the terms of this

License. You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the

Source Code form of the Covered Software You distribute or otherwise make available. You must inform recipients of any such Covered

Software in Executable form as to how they can obtain such Covered

Software in Source Code form in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange.

3.2.

Modifications.

The Modifications that You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License. You represent that You believe

Your Modifications are Your original creation(s) and/or You have sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License.

3.3.

Required Notices.

You must include a notice in each of Your Modifications that identifies

You as the Contributor of the Modification. You may not remove or alter any copyright, patent or trademark notices contained within the

Covered Software, or any notices of licensing or any descriptive text giving attribution to any Contributor or the Initial Developer.

3.4.

Application of Additional Terms.

You may not offer or impose any terms on any Covered Software in

Source Code form that alters or restricts the applicable version of this

License or the recipients’ rights hereunder. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Software. However, you may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial

Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear that any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every

Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such

Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms

You offer.

3.5.

Distribution of Executable Versions.

You may distribute the Executable form of the Covered Software under the terms of this License or under the terms of a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable form does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient’s rights in the Source Code form from the rights set forth in this License. If

You distribute the Covered Software in Executable form under a different license, You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or

Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such

Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.

3.6.

Larger Works.

You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Software with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the

Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Software.

4. Versions of the License.

4.1.

New Versions.

Sun Microsystems, Inc. is the initial license steward and may publish revised and/or new versions of this License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. Except as provided in Section 4.3, no one other than the license steward has the right to modify this License.

4.2. Effect of New Versions.

You may always continue to use, distribute or otherwise make the

Covered Software available under the terms of the version of the

License under which You originally received the Covered Software. If the

Initial Developer includes a notice in the Original Software prohibiting it from being distributed or otherwise made available under any subsequent version of the License, You must distribute and make the

Covered Software available under the terms of the version of the

License under which You originally received the Covered Software.

Otherwise, You may also choose to use, distribute or otherwise make the Covered Software available under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by the license steward.

4.3. Modified Versions.

When You are an Initial Developer and You want to create a new license for Your Original Software, You may create and use a modified version of this License if You: (a) rename the license and remove any references to the name of the license steward (except to note that the license differs from this License); and (b) otherwise make it clear that the license contains terms which differ from this License.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.

COVERED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN

“AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,

WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF

DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR

NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND

PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU.

SHOULD ANY COVERED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY

RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER

CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY

SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF

WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.

NO USE OF ANY COVERED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED

HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.

6. TERMINATION.

6.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.

6.2. If You assert a patent infringement claim (excluding declaratory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial

Developer or Contributor against whom You assert such claim is referred to as “Participant”) alleging that the Participant Software

(meaning the Contributor Version where the Participant is a Contributor or the Original Software where the Participant is the Initial Developer) directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted directly or indirectly to You by such Participant, the Initial Developer (if the Initial Developer is not the Participant) and all Contributors under

Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from

Participant terminate prospectively and automatically at the expiration of such 60 day notice period, unless if within such 60 day period You withdraw Your claim with respect to the Participant Software against such Participant either unilaterally or pursuant to a written agreement with Participant.

6.3.

In the event of termination under Sections 6.1 or 6.2 above, all end user licenses that have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination (excluding licenses granted to You by any distributor) shall survive termination.

7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY,

WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR

OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER

CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED SOFTWARE,

OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY

PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF

GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR

MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES

OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR

PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S

NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH

LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY

TO YOU.

8. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.

The Covered Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in

48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” (as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 252.227-7014(a)(1)) and

“commercial computer software documentation” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R.

12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all

U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Software with only those rights set forth herein. This U.S. Government Rights clause is in lieu of, and supersedes, any other FAR, DFAR, or other clause or provision that addresses Government rights in computer software under this License.

9. MISCELLANEOUS.

This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by the law of the jurisdiction specified in a notice contained within the Original

Software (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding such jurisdiction’s conflict-of-law provisions. Any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the courts located in the jurisdiction and venue specified in a notice contained within the Original Software, with the losing party responsible for costs, including, without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations

Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this

License. You agree that You alone are responsible for compliance with the United States export administration regulations (and the export control laws and regulation of any other countries) when You use, distribute or otherwise make available any Covered Software.

10. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.

As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with

Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTICE PURSUANT TO SECTION 9 OF THE COMMON

DEVELOPMENT AND DISTRIBUTION LICENSE (CDDL)

For Covered Software in this distribution, this License shall be governed by the laws of Germany (excluding conflict-of-law provisions).

Any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction and the courts of Berlin Germany, with venue lying in Berlin Germany.

The FreeType Project LICENSE

----------------------------

2002-Apr-11

Copyright 1996-2002 by

David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg

Introduction

============

The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project.

This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the

FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least.

This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent

JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:

1 We don’t promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind of bug reports. (às is’ distribution)

1 You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free’ usage)

1 You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits’)

We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.

Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text:

“Portions of this software are copyright © 1996-2002 The FreeType

Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.”

Legal Terms

===========

1. Definitions

--------------

Throughout this license, the terms `package’, `FreeType Project’, and

`FreeType archive’ refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the

`FreeType Project’, be they named as alpha, beta or final release.

`You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where ùsing’ is a generic term including compiling the project’s source code as well as linking it to form a `program’ or èxecutable’. This program is referred to as à program using the FreeType engine’.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this.

The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below.

2. No Warran ty

--------------

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED ÀS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY

OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS

OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED

BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

3. Redistribution

-----------------

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT’) unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files.

o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn’t mandatory.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the

FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

4. Advertising

--------------

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project’, `FreeType Engine’, `FreeType library’, or `FreeType Distribution’.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it.

However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

5. Contacts

-----------

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [email protected]

Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven’t found anything to help you in the documentation.

o [email protected]

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.

o http://www.freetype.org

Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation.

You can also contact us individually at: David Turner {david.turner@ freetype.org} Robert Wilhelm {[email protected]} Werner

Lemberg {[email protected]}

RSA MD4 or MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm

License

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the “RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest

Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc.

MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty of any kind.

These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

The MIT License

Copyright 2008 Jeffrey Powers for Fluxcapacity Open Source.

Copyright 2011, John Resig

Copyright 2005-2009 Sam Stephenson

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the

“Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.




PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR

ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,

OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE

OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under the BSD license as follows.

Component Name lighttpd 1.4.26

License

BSD 2.0

License URL http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.html

lighttpd is a secure, fast, compliant, and very flexible webserver that has been optimized for high-performance environments. It has a very low memory footprint compared to other webservers and takes care of cpuload.

Its advanced feature-set (FastCGI, CGI, Auth, Output-Compression,

URL-Rewriting and many more) make lighttpd the perfect webserversoftware for every server that suffers load problems.

For more additional information, send email to [email protected].

Copyright (c) 2004, Kneschke, incremental

All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met :

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

1 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

1 Neither the name of the ‘incremental’ nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A


THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR








DAMAGE.

Component Name librtp 1.20

License

BSD 2.0

License URL http://www.opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.html


Copyright (c) 1998-2000 University College London


Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, is permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1.


2.


3.

All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the Computer Science Department at

University College London

4.

Neither the name of the University nor of the Department may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AND

CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED




THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR








DAMAGE.

Component Name net-snmp-5.4.1

License

BSD

License URL http://www.net-snmp.org/about/license.html

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internetstandard protocol for managing devices on IP networks. It is used mostly in network management systems to monitor the devices attached to the network for conditions that need administrative attention. Net-SNMP is a suite of applications used to implement SNMP v1, SNMP v2c and

SNMP v3 using both IPv4 and IPv6.


Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts.

Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like)

Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University

Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000

Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The

Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.

CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,

INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,

INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES

WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR

PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN

CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc



1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.






THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR









DAMAGE.

Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice

(BSD)

Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge

Broadband Ltd.



1.


2.


3.

The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS

IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT


MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice

(BSD)

Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa

Clara, California 95054, U.S.A.


Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun

Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.















DAMAGE.

Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) 2003-2009, Sparta, Inc



1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.















DAMAGE.

Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of

Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.



1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and

Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.















DAMAGE.

Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 [email protected]

Author: Bernhard Penz


1.


2.


3.

The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS

IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT



ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Part 8: Apple Inc. copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) 2007 Apple Inc.



1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of Apple Inc. (“Apple”) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS

“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF


ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR

ITSCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,

INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR

PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN

IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Part 9: ScienceLogic, LLC copyright notice (BSD)

Copyright (c) 2009, ScienceLogic, LLC


Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions aremet:

1.


2.


3.

Neither the name of ScienceLogic, LLC nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.















DAMAGE.

Component Name miniupnpc 1.5

License

BSD 2.0

License URL http://miniupnp.free.fr/


Copyright (c) 2005-2009, Thomas BERNARD



1.


2.


3.

The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.





PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR








DAMAGE.

Component Name ppp 2.4.5

License

BSD 2.0

License URL http://packages.debian.org/changelogs/pool/main/p/ppp/ppp_2.4.5-5.1/ ppp-udeb.copyright


Copyright (c) 2003 Paul Mackerras.



1.


2.

The name(s) of the authors of this software must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

3.

Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by Paul

Mackerras <[email protected]>”.

THE AUTHORS OF THIS SOFTWARE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES

WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER

RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN

AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS

ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

Copyright (c) 1995 Pedro Roque Marques.



1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3.

The names of the authors of this software must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

4.

Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by

Pedro Roque Marques <[email protected]>”










Copyright (c) 1995 Eric Rosenquist.



1.


2.


3.











Copyright (c) 2002 Google, Inc.



1.


2.


3.











Copyright (c) 2001 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.


Non-exclusive rights to redistribute, modify, translate, and use this software in source and binary forms, in whole or in part, is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice is duplicated in any source form, and that neither the name of the copyright holder nor the author is used to endorse or promote products derived from this software.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED `ÀS IS’’ AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS

OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Copyright (c) 1999 Tommi Komulainen.



1.


2.


endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission.

4.


Tommi Komulainen <[email protected]>”.










Copyright (c) 1984-2000 Carnegie Mellon University.



1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3.

The name “Carnegie Mellon University” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For permission or any legal details, please contact Office of Technology Transfer Carnegie Mellon University 5000 Forbes

Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213-3890 (412) 268-4387, fax: (412)

268-7395 [email protected]

4.


Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon University (http://www.cmu.

edu/computing/).”

CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES



SHALL CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY BE LIABLE FOR ANY

SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY

DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA

OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR

IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

Samsung Techwin respeta el medio ambiente durante todo el proceso de fabricación de sus productos y realiza una serie de procedimientos orientados a ofrecer productos ecológicos.

El símbolo Eco representa el compromiso de Samsung Techwin de fabricar productos que respeten el medio ambiente e indica a la vez que este equipo cumple con la Directiva de la Unión Europea EU RoHS.

Correct Disposal of This Product

(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)

This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.

Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.

Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.

Correct disposal of batteries in this product

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)

This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive

2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment.

To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.

SALES NETWORK

SAMSUNG TECHWIN CO., LTD.

Samsungtechwin R&D Center, 701, Sampyeong-dong, Bundang-gu, Seongnam-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea, 463-400

TEL : +82-70-7147-8740~60 FAX : +82-31-8018-3745

SAMSUNG TECHWIN AMERICA Inc.

100 Challenger Rd. Suite 700 Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660

Toll Free : +1-877-213-1222 Direct : +1-201-325-6920

Fax : +1-201-373-0124 www.samsungcctvusa.com

www.samsungtechwin.com

www.samsungsecurity.com

www.samsungipolis.com

SAMSUNG TECHWIN EUROPE LTD.

Samsung House, 1000 Hillswood Drive, Hillswood Business

Park Chertsey, Surrey, UNITED KINGDOM KT16 OPS

TEL : +44-1932-45-5300 FAX : +44-1932-45-5325

Quick Network Setup Guide

Connecting to the network using a router

By using a router, you can connect your computer and 1 ~ 3 DVR machines to the internet by sharing 1 internet connection via xDSL or cable modem.

This installation guide aims at casual users, not for network professionals.

POWER REC NETWORK

DVR

INTERNET

POWER REC NETWORK

DVR

IP Sharer xDSL or

Cable Modem xDSL or

Cable Modem

External

Remote PC

Local PC

DDNS Server

(www.samsungioplis.com)

For proper use of the router, strictly follow the steps 1 to 5.

Configure your router, computer and DVR equipments as described in the following steps.

Step 1. Connecting Cables

Step 2. Connecting your local computer to the router

Step 3. Connecting DVR to the router

Step 4. Connecting the router to the internet service line

Step 5. Configuring router’s port forwarding

Step 6. Accessing DVR using DDNS service in dynamic IP environment

English-1

Step 1. Connecting Cables

1. Connect the internet service line (xDSL/Cable Modem) to your router’s Internet (WAN) port.

2. Connect Ethernet cables from your computer and

DVRs to the LAN (1 to 4) ports of the router.

INTERNET

DDNS Server

(www.samsungioplis.com)

Cable/ADSL/VDSL or

Direct LAN

(Dynamic/Static IP)

Broadband Router

POWER REC NETWORK

Local PC

Step 2. Connecting your local computer to the router

Step 2.1 Connection Setup

1.

Click [ Start ] on your computer.

2. Open the < Control Panel >-< Network Connections >.

The “ Network Connections ” window appears.

3. Select < Local Area Connection > and right click on it.

4. Select < Properties >.

DVR

5.

“ Local Area Connection Properties ” window appears.

6. Select < Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) > and click [ Properties ] button.

English-2

7.

Select < Obtain an IP address automatically > and < Obtain

DNS server address automatically >, and click [ OK ] button.

8.

Click [ OK ] button to finish the setup.

Step 2.2 Confirming the Connection

1. Click [ Start ] on your computer.

2.

Click [ Run… ].

3. On the appeared command dialog, type ‘cmd’ in the < Open > box and click [ OK ].

4.

In the DOS command window [ cmd.exe

], type ‘ipconfig’ and press [ Enter ].

5.

Run the Internet Explorer, and enter the < Default Gateway >

IP address found from the “ cmd.exe

” window into the address field, and press [ Enter ].

6.

The router’s login page will appear if all connections are properly established.

English-3

7. If the connection does not establish, check all cable connections and go to step 2.1 and select < Repair >.

On the “ Local Area Connection Status ” window, click

< Support > tab and check < Default Gateway > if matches to the one found in the [ cmd.exe

], and check the connection again.

Step 3. Connecting DVR to the router

Step 3.1 Configuring DVR router setup


2. Use the left/right button (◄►) to select < Network >.

Network menu is selected.

3. Use the up/down buttons (▲▼) to move to < Connection Mode >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

4. Select < Interface >.

A window of connection mode setup appears.

Connection Mode

Interface


x Gateway 192.168.1.1

x Subnet Mask x DNS

255.255.255.0

Manual 168.126.63.1

5.

Use direction buttons (▲▼◄►) to move to a desired item.

OK Cancel

6. Enter the < IP address >.

The IP address consists of 4 fields, and the first 3 fields should be same to those of < Default Gateway > address of your computer which can be found in Step 2, and the last field should be unoccupied number (between 2 and 254).

 ex) IP : 192.168.1.200

7. Enter the < Gateway > and < Subnet Mask > as same to those of your computer found in Step 2.

8. Set the < Device Port > and < HTTP Port >.

Set the Device Port and HTTP Port by referring to next page.

Connection Mode

Interface

Port x Protocol Type TCP x Device Port 4520 4524 x x

UDP Port

Unicast/Multicast x Multicast IP Address x Multicast TTL

8000 ~ 8160

Unicast

224.126.63.1

5 x HTTP Port 80 x Secure Video Transmission ON OFF



OK Cancel

English-4

What is port?

As usual, the < HTTP Port > uses port 80.

If the port is not setted, it is automatically regarded to 80 in http protocol.

For example, http://www.yahoo.com and http://www.yahoo.com:80 are regarded the same.

Hence, if the < HTTP Port > has been changed other than 80, you need to specify the address as: http://< IP

ADDRESS >:< HTTP Port >

 ex) http://192.168.1.200:80 to connect to the DVR using internet browser.

(Only when the port is set to 80, you can omit the port in the address.)

It is recommended to set < HTTP Port > to port number between 1024 and 65535.

If the port is not set to 80, accessing can be restricted depending on your service provider’s security policy or firewall configuration.

DVR uses < HTTP Port > and < Device Port > for web connections.

< HTTP Port > is used for accessing DVR by using an internet browser.

< Device Port > is used for receiving video from DVR to internet browser.

J 

When configuring multiple DVR, < device.

HTTP Port > and < Device Port > settings should be configured differently for each

 ex) DVR #1 Device Port : 4520, HTTP Port : 80

DVR #2 Device Port : 50000, HTTP Port : 2000

Step 3.2 Checking DVR connection on your computer

1.

Run the Internet Explorer, and enter the < IP ADDRESS > and

< HTTP Port > of the DVR into the address, and press [ Enter ].

 ex) http://192.168.1.200:80

2. If the connection establishes properly, the Web Viewer screen appears.

3. If the connection fails, check Steps 1, 2 and 3 to confirm the connection setup.

English-5

Step 4. Connecting the router to the internet service line

Internet connection setup method and steps may differ from routers, check your router’s setup method.

Connection types according to your internet service

Setting the internet connection may differ from internet service types, check your environment before proceeding and select the appropriate connection type.

1 DHCP(Dynamic) : IP environment which allocates IP address automatically.

1 Static(Fixed) : IP environment using public IP addresses.

1 PPPoE: Common in DSL environments, which requires ADSL access ID and password.

Ask your internet service provider for the user ID and password.



Name of each type described above may differ from router manufacturers.

Step 4.1 Connection guide by routers

Step 4.1-Case 1. D-LINK DIR-330

1. Run the Internet Explorer and enter the < Default Gateway > found in Step 2 into the address field and press [ Enter ].

2. When the router login screen appears, enter the < User name > and < Password >.

Refer to the router user manual for ID and password.

3.

Select internet connection method from connection setup wizard and manual setup.

Selecting the Internet Connection Setup Wizard automatically moves to the next step.

4. For manual setups, click < Manual Configure >.

English-6

5.

Select your < Internet Connection Type >.

Dynamic IP Address Environment

6. Select < Dynamic IP (DHCP) >.

7.

Click [ Save Settings ] button.

Static IP Address Environment

6. Select < Static IP >.

7.

Enter the < IP Address >, < Subnet Mask >, and < ISP Gateway

Address > assigned by your ISP.

8. Click [ Save Settings ] button.

ADSL Environment

6. Select < PPPoE (Username/Password) >.

7.

Enter your < User Name > and < Password >.

Ask your internet service provider for the username and password.

English-7

Step 4.1-Case 2. NETGEAR WGR614SS


2.

Enter the user name and password when the router login window appears.

Refer to the router user manual for user name and password.

3.

Click < Setup >-< Basic Settings > on the left menu.

Click < Setup Wizard > for automatic setup.


4. Select < Get Dynamically From ISP >.

5.

Click [ Apply ] button.


4. Select < Use Static IP Address >.

5.

Enter < IP Address >, < IP Subnet Mask > and < Gateway IP

Address >.

6.

Click [ Apply ] button.

English-8

7.

It saves the changes.

To check the connection

Once connected, status indicator < DHCPClient > is displayed on the top side of the settings screen.

Step 4.1-Case 3. LINKSYS WRT54G


2. When the router login screen appears, enter the < User name > and < Password >.


3. Click < Internet Setup >.

4. Select your < Internet Connection Type >.

According to your selection of connection type, different settings screen will appear.

English-9


5. Select < Automatic Configuration – DHCP >.

6.

Click [ Save Settings ] button on the bottom.


5. Select < Static IP >.

6.

Enter < Internet IP Address >, < Subnet Mask >, and

< Gateway > assigned by your ISP.

7.


ADSL Environment

5. Select < PPPoE >.

6.

Enter your < User Name > and < Password >.

Ask your internet service provider for the username and password.

7.


8. Once finished, completion screen appears.

English-10

Step 4.1-Case 4. BELKIN F5D8236-4


2.

Click < WAN >-< Connection Type >.

Select your internet service type.


3. Select < Dynamic > for the connection type and click [ Next> ] button.

4.

Enter the < Host Name > and click [ Apply Changes ] button.



If your ISP provided specific DNS addresses, click < WAN >-< DNS > and enter the provided DNS addresses.


3. Select < Static > for the connection type and click [ Next> ] button.

4.

Enter the < IP Address > assigned by your ISP.

5. Enter < Subnet Mask > and < ISP Gateway Address >.

6.

Click [ Apply Changes ] button.

ADSL Environment

3.

Select < PPPoE > for the connection type and click [ Next> ] button.

4. Enter user name and password.

Ask your internet service provider for the user name and password.

5.

Click [ Apply Changes ] button.

English-11


Once connected, status indicator < Connection > is displayed on the top side of the settings screen.

Step 4.1-Case 5. TRENDNET TEW-652BRP

1.

Run the Internet Explorer and enter the < Default Gateway > found in Step 2 into the address field and press [ Enter ].

2.

Enter the user name and password when the router login window appears.


3. Click < WAN > on the left menu of he settings screen.

4. Select your < Connection Type >.


5.

Select < DHCP Client or Fixed IP >.

6. Click < Obtain IP Automatically >.




7.

Click [ Apply ] button on the bottom.

English-12


5. Select < DHCP Client or Fixed IP >.

6.

Select < Specify IP >.

7. Enter the < IP Address >, < Subnet Mask >, and < Default

Gateway >.

8.

Enter < DNS1 > and < DNS2 >.




9. When finished, click [ Apply ] button on the bottom.

ADSL Environment

5. Select < PPPoE >.

6. Select appropriate method of obtaining < WAN IP > address.

7.

Enter the < Service Name >, < User Name > and < Password >.

Ask your internet service provider for the user name and password.


8. Click < Status >-< Device Information > on the left menu, and check the server’s current status at < DHCP Server > under the

LAN category.

When the connection establishes successfully, it displays

< Enabled DHCP Table >.

English-13

Step 4.2 Checking the connection to the internet

1. Run the Internet Explorer on your computer.

2. Enter the < Default Gateway > found in the Step 2 into the address field and press [ Enter ].

3. Click Status tab on the router menu.

4. Check the WAN (Internet) connection status and WAN (Internet)

IP address.

5. When the connection establishes successfully, it displays

< DHCP Client Connected > message and the WAN (Internet) IP shows an address.

6.

Using the Internet Explorer, access Yahoo, Google and other well known web servers.

7. If the connection is properly set, Internet Explorer displays visiting web server’s page correctly.

8. If connection fails, go to Step 4 and check again.

Step 5. Port forwarding

Port forwarding should be configured for accessing from the outside of the router network to a computer or DVR is connected to the router.

Configure your router’s port forwarding as followings.

What is port forwarding?

It is a port mapping function of < Router’s WAN (Internet) IP: Port > to < DVR’s IP: Port >, that helps opening a communication channel between inside and outside of the private LAN

Since one DVR uses 2 ports for communication, port forwarding setup for both 2 ports should be configured.

J 

If only <HTTP Port> is configured for port forwarding:

Accessing through the web browser is possible but video is not received since the < Device Port > for video data communication is not configured for port forwarding.

If only <Device Port> is configured for port forwarding:

Accessing through the web browser is impossible since the < HTTP Port > for the communication is not configured for port forwarding.

In the below, port forwarding methods for each router are explained.

For other routers not guided herein, refer to the user manual of the router.

English-14

Step 5.1 Port forwarding guide by routers

Run the Internet Explorer and enter the < Default Gateway > of the computer, which is the router’s IP address found in

Step 2, into the address field and pres [ Enter ].

Step 5.1-Case 1. D-LINK DIR-330

1. Select < Advanced >.

2.

Set the < HTTP Port > for port forwarding.

2 -1 . Check the < Checkbox > to select it.

2 -2 . Name > field.

 ex) DVR1

2 -3 . Public Port >, enter the < HTTP Port > defined in

Step 3.

 ex) 80~80

2 -4 . Private Port >, enter the < HTTP Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 80~80

2 -5 . In the < IP Address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

2 -6 . For the < Traffic Type >, select < Any >.

3.

Set the < Device Port > for port forwarding.

3 -1 . Check the < Checkbox > to select it.

3 -2 . Enter a name for the DVR port in the < Name > field.

 ex) DVR2

3 -3 . Public Port >, enter the < Device Port > defined in

Step 3.

 ex) 4520~4524

3 -4 . In the < Private Port >, enter the < Device Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 4520~4524


 ex) 192.168.1.200

4. After completion, click [ Save Settings ] button.

80

80

80

80

80

80

4520

4520

80

80

4524

4524

Step 5.1-Case 2. NETGEAR 614SS

1. Click < Port Forwarding / Port Triggering > in the left menu.

2.

Select < Port Forwarding >.

3. Set the < HTTP Port > for port forwarding.

3 -1 . Set the < Add Custom Service > for port forwarding.

English-15

3 -2 . Service Name > field.

 ex) DVR1

3 -3 . Starting Port > and < Ending Port > while matching to that of < HTTP Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 80

3 -4 . Server IP Address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

3 -5 . Click ] button to finish the setting.

4. Set the < Device Port > for port forwarding.

4 -1 . Click Add Custom Service > button.

4 -2 . Device Port > in the

< Service Name > field.

 ex) DVR2

4 -3 . Start Port > and < End Port > while matching to that of < Device Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 4520,4521,4522,4523,4524

4 -4 . Server IP Address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

4 -5 . Click ] button to finish the setting.

80

80

80

4520

80

4524

Step 5.1-Case 3. LINKSYS WRT54G

1.

Click < Applications & Gaming >.

2.

Set the < HTTP Port > for port forwarding.

2 -1 . Enter a name for the DVR port in the < Application > field.

 ex) DVR1

2 -2 . Start > and < End > fields, enter the < HTTP Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 80

2 -3 . Select ] for the < Protocol >.

2 -4 . IP Address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in

Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

2 -5 . Enable > column for the specified port.

3.

Set the < Device Port > for port forwarding.

3 -1 . Enter a name for the DVR port in the < Application > field.

 ex) DVR2

3 -2 . Start > and < End > fields, enter the < Device Port > defined in Step 3.

3 -3 . Select ] for the < Protocol >.


 ex) 192.168.1.200

3 -5 . Check the checkbox of < Enable > column for the specified port.

80

4520

80

4524

English-16

4.


5. Once finished, completion screen appears.

Step 5.1-Case 4. BELKIN F5D8236-4

1.

Click < Firewall >-< Virtual Servers > on the left menu.


2 -1 . Check the < Enable > checkbox to mark selected.

2 -2 . Enter a name for the DVR port in the < Description > field.

 ex) DVR1

2 -3 . Inbound port >, enter the < HTTP Port > defined in

Step 3.

 ex) 80

2 -4 . For the < Type >, select [ Any ].

2 -5 . In the < Private IP address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

2 -6 . In the < Private port > field, enter the < HTTP Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 80


3 -1 . Check the < Enable > checkbox to mark selected.

3 -2 . Enter a name for the DVR port in the < Description > field.

 ex) DVR2

3 -3 . Inbound port > fields, enter the < Device Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 4520,4521,4522,4523,4524

3 -4 . For the < Type >, select [ Any ].

3 -5 . Private IP address >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

3 -6 . In the < Private port > fields, enter the < Device Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 4520,4521,4522,4523,4524

4. Once finished, click [ Apply Changes ] button.

80

80

4524

English-17

80

80

4524

Step 5.1-Case 5. TRENDNET TEW-652BRP

1. Click < Access >-< Virtual Server > on the left menu.


2 -1 . Select ] for the item < Enable >.


 ex) DVR1

2 -3 . Select ] for the item < Protocol >.

2 -4 . Private Port > and < Public Port > fields, enter the

< HTTP Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 80

2 -5 . In the < LAN Server >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

2 -6 . Click ] button.


3 -1 . Select ] for the item < Enable >.


 ex) DVR2

3 -3 . Select ] for the item < Protocol >.

3 -4 . Private Port > and < Public Port > fields, enter the

< Device Port > defined in Step 3.

 ex) 4520,4521,4522,4523,4524

3 -5 . In the < LAN Server >, enter the DVR's IP address defined in Step 3.

 ex) 192.168.1.200

3 -6 . Click ] button.

4.

Settings completed.

80

80

4524

4524

Step 5.2 Checking port forwarding on your computer

1. Confirm the router’s < WAN (Internet) IP > which has been checked in Step 4.2 again.

2.

Confirm the DVR’s < HTTP Port > checked in Step 3.1 again.

3.

Run the Internet Explorer and enter http://< WAN (Internet) IP >:< HTTP Port > into the address field and press [ Enter ].

4. DVR's Web Viewer screen appears if port forwarding configuration has been properly set.

5.

If you cannot access to the Web Viewer or accessed but no video is displayed, go to the Step 5.1 and check again.

J 

If only <HTTP Port> is configured for port forwarding:

Accessing through the web browser is possible but video is not received since the < Device Port > for video data communication is not configured for port forwarding.

If only <Device Port> is configured for port forwarding:

Accessing through the web browser is impossible since the < HTTP Port > for the communication is not configured for port forwarding.

English-18

Step 6. Accessing DVR using DDNS service in dynamic IP environment

Since the router’s WAN IP address may vary in xDSL/Cable connections hiring dynamic IP allocations, DDNS (Dynamic Domain

Name Server) service is provided for accessing the DVR with fixed DDNS address in dynamic IP network environments.

Step 6.1 DVR DDNS configuration

1.

Use the up/down buttons (▲▼) in < Network > window to move to

< DDNS >, and press [ ENTER ] button.

2.

Use virtual keyboard to enter user inputs.



Refer to “ Using Virtual Keyboard ”.

1 If selected < OFF > or < iPOLiS >, input fields are deactivated.

1 If you select < iPOLiS >, the “DDNS Host Address” item will be displayed.

Type your set ID in < Product ID > field.

More specific information is in “ iPOLiS DDNS Setting ”.

DDNS x DDNS Site x Server Name iPOLiS www.samsungip...

x Product ID SDR5102HOMEDVR x Quick Connect Use x DDNS Host Address http://www.samsungipolis.com/HOMEDVR

OK Cancel

Select < Use > in < Quick Connect > menu. After finishing “ iPOLiS

DDNS Setting ”, you can connect your DVR set with the address < http://www.samsungipolis.com/

SDR5102HOMEDVR >.



The router used should support uPNP Port Forwarding function.



Note that uPNP Port Forwarding does not support UDP protocol.



If the program fails to read uPNP Port Forwarding List, try again after restarting the computer and router.

3.

When the DDNS setup is done, press < OK >.

Step 6.2 Accessing DVR using DDNS address

1. Run the Internet Explorer and enter the DDNS address found in

Step 6.1 into the address field end press [ Enter ].

http://www.samsungipolis.com/SDR5102HOMEDVR

2. DVR’s Web Viewer screen appears.

3. If failed with accessing, go to the Step 6.1 and check the settings again.

M 

It may take up to 10 minutes for updating the router’s IP address recorded in the DDNS server. When failed with accessing, retry after 10 minutes.

DVR reports its IP address to the DDNS server at every 10 minutes.

Configuration completed.

By remembering the DDNS address, ID and password, you can connect to your DVR from any computer that is connected to the internet.

For further operating information, refer to the user manual.

English-19

SMARTVIEWER 4.3.2

User Manual

Before installing or while using this program, visit the Samsung website www.samsungsecurity.com and download and upgrade with the latest S/W version available.

overview

CONTENTS

OVERVIEW

2

2 Contents

4 SmartViewer?

5 Key Features of SmartViewer

5 Terminology

INSTALLATION

6

6 Installation

8 To check the Installation Status

SMARTVIEWER

9

9 Log

11 SmartViewer at a Glance

LIVE VIEWER

12

12 Name and function of each item in Live Viewer

14 Name and function of each item in the Video

Window

15 Connecting to or Disconnecting from the Device

16 Camera

17 Alarm Out List & Control

18 Event

20 List of Device Status Information

21 Favorite

22 Digital

24 PTZ

27 To control the video of the Live Viewer

2_ overview

SEARCH VIEWER

33

33 Name and function of each item in Search

Viewer

34 Device

34 Date

35 POS

36 Heatmap

37 Advanced

37 Digital

38 PTZ

38 Searching for Playable Data

40 Playback

41 Backup

SETUP

43

43 Option

47 Hide Camera Tab

48 User

49 Viewer-Update

51 Log Information Tab

52 Device Registration Tab

55 Device-Update

57 Open Source License Notification On The

Product

English

_3

overview

WHAT IS SMARTVIEWER?

SmartViewer is an access control tool that enables you to connect to and control a remote Samsung product on your

PC via the network.

With this tool, you can access Samsung products anywhere around the world via the network, and check the video data from the connected cameras.

You can also search for and play recording data in the product on a remote site, which will be an effective and convenient monitoring system.

Not Supported

SVR-440, SVR-450, SVR-470, SVR-940, SHR-3040

System Requirements

Item

CPU

RAM

HDD

VGA Adapter

Display resolution

OS

NIC CARD

Minimum PC Specification

CPU Intel i3 or faster

3GB or higher

200GB or higher

Recommended PC Specification

CPU Intel i7 (Sandy bridge) or faster

4GB or higher

200GB or higher

1GB or higher 512MB or higher

1024 x 768 or higher

Windows XP Professional SP2, Windows Vista Business/

Ultimate, Windows 7 Professional/Ultimate/Enterprise, Windows 8 32/64bit,

DirectX 9.0 or later, OpenGL compatible

100 MB Ethernet NIC

(Gigabit Ethernet recommended)

M 

You may run SmartViewer regardless of OS login account.

- For versions prior to v3.13, only Administrator’s account can run it.

- Installation, uninstallation and updating requires administrator’s privilege of your operating system.



Pay attention to below cautions when updating from v3.12 or earlier.

- File paths for logs, recordings, backups and captured images will be changed.(existing files remain in the previous file location.)

- If selected a file path having insufficient permission, setting is applied but will not write files.

- Running two or more CMS instances on one PC using different user accounts is not guaranteed with proper operation.

4_ overview

KEY FEATURES OF SMARTVIEWER

1 Live Viewer

- Monitor a maximum of 36 videos from the connected cameras

- Save up to 2 hours of video as one monitoring file

- Support full screen mode

- Add video to a desired position with the drag & drop method

- Add video to the video screen by double-clicking

- Support Sequence (automatic screen transition)

- Favorite View & Sequence of Favorites

1 Search Viewer

- Play up to 16 videos simultaneously

- Support range backup (integrated viewer)

- Search for and play recording data in the device, which are sorted by the event type

1 Setup

- User login & access privilege setup

- Register/Manage up to 3000 device

- Create one group of multiple devices

(up to 100 groups, up to 36 devices for a group)

- Save device configuration as a file

- Save SmartViewer configuration as a file

- Log Search (search by the system, user, record or backup log, etc)

1 Update

- Remote update using the update server

TERMINOLOGY

1 Device : Network camera/DVR/NVR that tries to access the network via SmartViewer.

1 Tree : An area to show the information of devices, cameras, alarm events and users (groups) and their correlations.

1 fps (frames per second) : UOM of informing how many frames will be displayed per second.

1 Resolution : Size of an original video from a connected camera.

The following resolutions are predefined:

- 4CIF : 704X480(NTSC), 704X576(PAL)

- VGA : 640X480(NTSC), 640X576(PAL)

- CIF : 352X240(NTSC), 352X288(PAL)

English

_5

installation

INSTALLATION

Install SmartViewer on a local PC and launch it.

1. Run the executable of SmartViewer (Setup Launcher) that is included in the installation CD or stored in your PC.

2.

When you see the installation guide screen, click [ Next > ].

3. Specify the destination folder in which the installation files are copied.

The default path is “C:\Program Files\Samsung\

SmartViewer\”.

- To change the path, click [ Change...

] and specify a desired path or select a folder.

4. To proceed with the next step, click [ Next > ].

5. Click [ Install ] to start the installation.

6_ installation

6. Installing SmartViewer will proceed.

7.

When the installation is completed, click [ Finish ] to exit the installation screen.

English

_7

installation

Upgrade

If you have SmartViewer installed on your PC, click the updater program to proceed with the upgrade.

1. Run the updater program, “ Setup Launcher ”.

The confirmation dialog pops up.

2.

Click [ Next > ].

M 

Malfunction may occur when SmartViewer is executed immediately after program upgrade.

Execute SmartViewer after rebooting PC.

TO CHECK THE INSTALLATION STATUS

When the installation is done, check if SmartViewer is installed properly.

1. Move to the < Start > menu.

2. If SmartViewer is installed properly, you will see two sub menus under SmartViewer: < SmartViewer > and

< Uninstall SmartViewer >.

8_ installation

SmartViewer

On your desktop, click the program icon that has been created automatically.

SmartViewer gets started.

LOG IN/OUT

Login

To access SmartViewer, you must log in with a registered account at first.

1.

On your desktop, click the SmartViewer icon.

The login dialog should appear.

2. Provide the user ID and password.

Default ID : ADMIN

M 

You must set the password of basic ID for the first login.

Password must consist of 8 – 31 digits with a combination of English characters and numbers.

If the same password is used for 30 days and longer, a message recommending password change is displayed.



If you have set < Auto Login(admin) > in the Setup menu, you will be logged in automatically when the program starts.

English

_9

SmartViewer

M 

The following is an example of login failure, where you will see the error message.



Login is disabled for 30 seconds if incorrect password is entered three times in a row.

<If an unregistered account is entered> <If you enter an incorrect password>

<If incorrect password is entered three times in a row>

Logout

When you have done with SmartViewer, log out to exit it.

When you log out, the current screen configuration will be saved with all program windows closed, and you will return to the login dialog.

1.

From the main window, click [ Logout ].

The logout dialog should appear.

2. Select [ Yes ] in the dialog.

You will be logged out.

If you exit SmartViewer, You will be logged out automatically.

10_

SmartViewer

SMARTVIEWER AT A GLANCE

SmartViewer Screen Configuration.

b c

Item

ID b

S/W title bar c

Log Out

Live

Search

Setup

Exit

Video Screen

Description

Shows the user ID.

Displays the name of the software.

Click to log out.

Launches the Live Viewer.

Launches the Search Viewer.

Open the setup screen.

Terminates the application.

Displays the Live Viewer or Search Viewer.

English

_11

live viewer

From the top right corner of the SmartViewer main screen, click the [ Live ] tab.

NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH ITEM IN LIVE VIEWER

b

A trq n m

Item

Device List b

Connect/Disconnect c

Video Screen

Defog

Contrast

Brightness

Description

Displays the list of registered devices.

It will show you only the connected devices when you have logged in.

You can search a device to connect.

Connects to or disconnects from the device.

Displays the Live Viewer screen.

Set Defog function of camera and adjust the level.

M 

Defog is an anti-fogging and demister function. This function lets you obtain clear videos in foggy environment or when your lens is misted.

You can adjust the contrast for the current screen.

You can adjust the brightness for the current screen.

12_ live viewer c

Item

OSD

Sequence

Delete all files

Switch Aspect Ratio

Full Screen

Factory Default m

Zoom In/Out n

Initialize the events

Talk

Volume Control

Speaker q

Device Recording r

Record

Print t

Save

A

Adjust Window Button

Description

Shows/hides the screen tip.

Performs automatic transition of the selected split screens.

Delete all video files in the tile.

Select an aspect ratio for display in the Live screen.

Displays the current video in full screen.

Returns the zoomed-in or –out screen to the default size (100%).

Enlarges or collapses the image.

This function removes event displayed at event occurrence.

You can use the microphone if the connected device supports the voice signal.

Use this to adjust the audio volume level.

Turns on or mutes the speakers.

Recording Performs or stops recording on the connected device.

Performs or stops recording in the selected video window.

Prints out the current video screen.

Saves the current image on the selected video screen as a picture format.

Displays or hides the menu window or the adjustment button.

Indications of the Video Input Status

You can check the input status of the camera video signal as follows:

1.

2.

3.

4.

: Video Loss

: Disconnected

: Excessive concurrent users

: Camera is turned off or in Covert mode

English

_13

live viewer

NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH ITEM IN THE VIDEO WINDOW

b c

Item

Camera Name b

Date & Time c

Device Recording

Record

Intelligent Video

Analysis

Audio Detection

Motion

Alarm

Speaker

PTZ

Description

Shows the name of the device.

Displays the creation time and date of the video.

Display the state of manual recording in progress/ recording stopped in the connected device.

M 

In some devices, both schedule/ manual recording states are displayed.

SmartViewer displays the recording status of the current PC: recording/stop.

When a selected video analysis event for the corresponding camera is detected, indicator’s color changes accordingly.

When an audio event for the corresponding camera is detected, indicator’s color changes accordingly.

The motion indicator is displayed if an event occurs from the connected camera.

The alarm indicator changes the color if an event occurs.

The speaker indicator displays the sound output status.

The PTZ indicator shows the availability of PTZ of the connected device.

14_ live viewer

Item

Microphone

Video Encryption

Description

Display the status of using the microphone.

It shows whether the video is encrypted or not.

Only available for devices that support encryption.

CONNECTING TO OR DISCONNECTING FROM THE DEVICE

To connect to the device

1. Select a device to connect to.

Only those devices or groups that are registered in the

Setup menu will be listed.

2. Click the [ Connect ( selection checkbox.

)] button to the right of the device

SmartViewer will try to connect to the selected device, and when connected, it will display a list of cameras that are connected to the device.

M 

To add a device to the list, see “ Setup > Device > Registration ”.

(page 52)



To connect to multiple devices simultaneously, try that with

“ Group ”.



If you log in again after you logged out, you will be connected to the last device or group automatically.



If you select a list and enter text (keyword), only those groups and devices that contain the text will be displayed in the search result. This is useful if you do the search for a long list of devices or groups.

To disconnect from the device

1. Press the [ Disconnect ( )] button.

2.

The device will be disconnected and a list of all registered devices will be displayed.

3. When disconnecting a device, “ Enter device name to search ” is shown in the search field, type in a name to search from registered devices.

English

_15

live viewer

CAMERA LIST

When the device is connected successfully, you will see a list of cameras that are connected to the device.

Camera icons & description

In the camera list, the icon to the left of the each camera name will show you the information of the specific camera.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

: General camera

: PTZ compliant camera

: Camera in recording

: Disconnected

: Camera in listening

: Camera where talking is in process

M 

More than one icon can be displayed next to one specific camera.

To rename a camera

1. Press the [ F2 ] or click the selected camera once again.

The camera name will be activated.

2.

Provide a desired name for the camera.

3.

When renaming a connected device/group, it prompts whether to disconnect it to continue renaming.

To find a camera

1. With the camera list active, press the key combination of

[ Ctrl+F ].

2.

When the Search dialog pops up, enter the camera name in

< Search For >.

3. Click [ Next Search ].

16_ live viewer

To select a tile

HowTo 1 : Select a tile and double-click a Desired camera.

The video from the selected camera will be displayed in the highlighted screen.

HowTo 2 : Select a camera and drag and drop it to a desired tile.

HowTo 3 : Drag and drop the selected camera video tile to a desired tile.

The screen will switch to display the video from the selected camera.

ALARM OUT LIST & CONTROL

When the device is connected successfully, you will see a list of Alarm Out events.

To control the Alarm Out

You can control the Alarm Out events of a device.

1.

Select a list of Alarm Out events.

2. Click the Control button in the title bar of the Alarm Out event.

This is a toggle button that can be switched according to the

Alarm Out status.

M 

Depending on the device, control of the Alarm Out may not be available.

To find an alarm

1.

With the camera list active, press the key combination of

[ Ctrl+F ].

2. When the Search dialog appears, provide an alarm name for < Search For >.

3.

Click [ Next Search ].

English

_17

live viewer

EVENT LIST

You can check the events that occurred from the device.

If an event occurs, the event video will be displayed automatically, of which you can change the settings in the

< Setup > menu.

Event icons & description

In the event list, the icon to the left of each event will show the event information.

1.

2.

3.

4.

: Displays the occurrence of the Motion event.

: Displays the occurrence of the video loss.

: Displays the occurrence of the alarm.

: Displays occurrences of intelligent video analysis events.

5. : Displays occurrences of audio detection events.

M 

When an event occurs for the first time, the red exclamation symbol will be displayed.



The occurrence count of each event will be shown in the top area of the event list.

To check the event

1.

The event list separates user-checked events from those that you didn’t check.

2. Double-click the event list.

You can check the video at the event occurrence time on a popup window.

3. From the event popup, click [ OK ].

The event status will be switched to Confirmed.

M 

If you click the Close button in the top right corner of the event popup, the video window will be closed without confirmation of the event.

18_ live viewer

Name and function of each item in the Event window

Pause

Play Play from 30 Seconds before the Occurrence

Previous Event

Fast Play

Move by the Frame

To check the entire events

1.

From the top of the event list, click [ Clear Event ( )].

2. Check all the events that are not confirmed.

For the event that is confirmed, the Unconfirmed icon in the right side will disappear.

To lock scrolling of the event list

1.

From the top of the event list, click [ Scroll Lock ( )].

With the scrolling locked, the scroll bar will not move even if an event occurs.

2. To release the scroll lock, click the button again.

The background color of the list window will disappear.

To remove the event list

1.

Select an event to remove from the event list.

2. From the title bar of the event list, click [ Remove ( )] to remove the selected list.

M 

Unconfirmed events will not be deleted.



You can check the list of events in the log area.

Post Event

English

_19

live viewer

To play the latest event video manually

1.

From the tile, select a channel to search for.

2.

Right-click the channel to display the context menu where you select [ Instant Replay ].

The Receive Events window will appear.

LIST OF DEVICE STATUS INFORMATION

You can check the status of the device.

To check the status information

1. Select a device status list.

2.

Check the status of the selected device.

Information including device status, name and occurrence time will be shown.

Device Icons & Description

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

: Start HDD recording

: HDD failure/HDD Full/No HDD

: Stop HDD recording

: Disconnected from the device

: Connection success/failure

20_ live viewer

FAVORITE LIST

Favorite is to save the current split mode setting and the videos from the cameras on the current screen.

The Favorite feature is available only if you access the group.

To add a favorite item

1. From the favorite item, click [ Add ( )].

You can add up to 10 favorite items.

2.

Select a site in the tree and press the [ Enter ] key.

The current split mode and the videos from the camera on the screen will be saved in the name you entered.

M 

Press the [ F2 ] key to rename the item.



You can add up to 10 favorite lists.



If the camera is not activated, videos are not displayed even if added to Favorite.

To edit the favorite

1. Select the Favorite and click on the [ Modify ( )] button.

2.

Edit the name of the selected Favorite item.

To import a favorite item

1.

From the favorite list, double-click an item to import.

2.

The favorite contents of the selected item will be applied on the screen.

To delete a favorite item

1. From the favorite list, select an item to delete.

2. Click the [ Recycle Bin ( )] button.

To switch the favorite item

1.

From the Favorite title bar, click [ Sequence ( )].

2. The items of the selected favorite will be displayed one by one on the screen at a specified interval.

After the last item is displayed, the screen will display back to the first item.

M 

In sequence mode of the favorite items, the following menus or functions will be disabled: disconnect, listen to sound, zoom in/out, screen sequence, favorite sequence, digital zoom, save favorites, delete favorites.

English

_21

live viewer

DIGITAL ZOOM

Digital Zoom is to enlarge the screen image using the magnifier function.

This is an enlarged image on the screen; however, it is different from the optical zooming.

The maximum factor of the digital zooming is x100 (10000%).

Name and function of each item in Digital Zoom

For the zooming purpose, you can use the buttons in the Digital Zoom list window as well as those in the bottom of the video window.

Current Zoom Factor

Enlarged Area

Zoom In Zoom Out

Zoom Factor Adjusting Bar

22_ live viewer

To select a digital zoom area

1. Click the [ Zoom In ( )] button on the bottom.

The shape of the mouse pointer will switch to [ ].

2.

Click an image to zoom in or select an area to enlarge.

The selected image will be enlarged 100% per click.

For a selected area, it will fit the screen.

3. Click the Zoom In button again.

The shape of the mouse pointer will switch to normal and the zoom mode will be released.

Digital zoom out

1. Click the [ Zoom Out ( )] button on the bottom.

The shape of the mouse pointer will switch to [ ].

2.

Select an image.

The selected image will be collapsed 100% per click.

3. Click the Zoom Out button again.

The shape of the mouse pointer will switch to normal and the zoom mode will be released.

To exit the digital zoom

1. Click the [ Restore the default ( )] button on the bottom.

2. The selected area will return to the default size and the digital zoom mode will be released.

To navigate through the screen area using the Pan cursor

1.

In zoom-in mode, move the cursor to the area box on the enlarged screen.

The cursor will switch to the Pan cursor.

2. With the Pan cursor active, click the mouse left button.

The Pan cursor switches its shape.

3.

While pressing and holding the mouse button, move the cursor to the area box.

M 

If you access your Fish eye camera, the digital zoom will only work in OverView.

English

_23

live viewer

PTZ CONTROL

If the connected device supports the PTZ functions, you can control the PTZ camera remotely.

M 

Some connected cameras may not support PTZ function. For more information, refer to camera's user manual.



Some PTZ functions can be controlled by the joystick.

Name and function of each item in the PTZ Control window

Cancel camera menu Power PTZ/Area Zoom/Fish Eye PTZ

Camera Menu

Menu Selection

Original size button

PTZ Ball Move

Up/Down/Left/Right

IRIS Adjustment Button Focus Adjustment Button

Zoom Adjustment Button

Preset

EX-AUX

Trace/Pattern

Group/Scan EX-AUX control button

To configure the Camera Menu

Click the Camera Menu button to toggle the display of the camera menu on the screen.

1.

Use the direction buttons around the PTZ ball to move to a desired item.

2. To select an item, simply click the PTZ ball.

Tour

Swing/Auto Pan

24_ live viewer

Control Power PTZ

Power PTZ is controlled with toggle. When Power PTZ is selected, the position clicked in video screen move to the center of the video.

Control Area Zoom

1. Area Zoom is controlled with toggle. When Area Zoom is selected, the position clicked in video screen moves to the center of the video.

2. When an area to enlarge is selected using a mouse, the zoom-in function is activated for the selected area.

Controlling the Fish Eye PTZ

1.

Fish eye PTZ is controlled with toggle. When Fish eye PTZ is selected, the PTZ will be moved in the direction of dragging in the video screen.

M 

Depending on the angle of the cursor movement, the speed of movement in the direction will be adjusted accordingly.

2. Using your mouse, you can perform zoom in and out.

To control the direction

If you click a nearer position from the center, the focus moves in that direction slowly; if clicking a farther position, the focus does that fast.

M 

Keep clicking on a left-side area to turn the lens clockwise; keep clicking on a right-side area will turn the lens counter clockwise.

To adjust the IRIS

This is to adjust the level of the exposure to the light.

1 Close IRIS : As the iris exposure is greater with a lesser light intensity, the scene gets dark.

1 Open IRIS : As the iris exposure is lower with a greater light intensity, the scene gets bright.

To adjust the focus

This is to adjust the focus manually.

1 Focus Near : Shifts the focus nearer.

1 Focus Far : Shifts the focus farther.

To control the zoom

1. Select the PTZ button in the left.

2.

Click the zoom slide bar.

You can control the zooming of the image.

1 Clicking on a right-side area from the center will zoom in the area; the farther area you click, the faster the zoom-in focus moves.

1 Clicking on a left-side area from the center will zoom out the area; the farther area you click, the faster the zoom-out focus moves.

M 

If you access your Fish eye camera, you can only use the zoom control function in a Single View.

English

_25

live viewer

To control the preset

You can save a specific position of the camera in advance or move to a predefined position.

If you click the Preset button, the preset list in the camera will be displayed.

M 

You can add up to 255 presets. (However, the maximum count of presets provided may differ by device.)

1 If you select a preset item in the list, the camera focus will move to the predefined position of the preset.

1 Provide a name for the list and click [ Add ] to save the current position as a preset.

1 Click [ Modify ] button after entering the name to edit selected item.

1 If you select a specific item in the list and click [ Delete ], the selected item will be removed from the list.

To control the group/scan

Scan enables you to navigate through the preset list one item by one.

You have only two options: activate/deactivate the [ Scan ] function.

To control the swing/auto pan

Auto Pan will repeat moving the focus between two different points.

You can set to rotate or repeat moving a specific range.

You have only two options: activate/deactivate the [ Auto Pan ] function.

To control the trace/pattern

Pattern will perform the predefined movement and zooming of the camera.

You have only two options: activate/deactivate the [ Pattern ] function.

To control the tour

This function is to call a group and to call and monitor presets designated to the group in order.

You can only select to activate or deactivate the [ Tour ] function that is set in the camera.

26_ live viewer

TO CONTROL THE VIDEO OF THE LIVE VIEWER

You can save, print or record the video on the video screen of the selected camera.

Capture Record

Print

To capture the screen

This is to capture the video on the video screen in the picture format.

You can choose to display the camera title, recording date/time and description on the video and specify the saving path.

1.

Click [ Capture ( )] on the bottom of the video screen.

2. Select a desired item(s) to display on the screen.

3. Click [ Set Path ( )] to specify the saving path.

4.

Click [ OK ].

The screen will be saved in the specified path.

M 

You can use the tile context menu to save the screen.

To print the screen

This is to print out the video on the video screen using the connected printer.

You can choose to display the camera title, recording date/time and description on the printout screen.

1.

Click [ Print ( )] on the bottom of the video screen.

2. The “ Print ” dialog will appear where you select an item(s) to display on the screen.

3.

Click [ OK ].

The selected screen will be printed out using the printer specified in your PC.



The user with no printing permission will not be allowed to make a printout after logged in.

M 

You can use the tile context menu to print out the screen.

English

_27

live viewer

Record

This is to record the video on the selected video screen in a video format.

The video will be saved in the proprietary format with the dedicated viewer included.

1.

Click [ Record ( )] on the bottom of the video screen.

2. When the recording starts on the selected video screen, the record icon will be active.

3. To stop recording, click the record button again.

M 

You can record a maximum of 2 hours of video at once; however, you can change the maximum recording time in the Setup menu.



Recording will automatically stop at the end of the specified recording time.



In sequence mode, the record function will be disabled.



You will encounter a warning message if you try to move to a different screen from the current recording screen, change the viewer or close the application.

To fit the screen

1.

Click [ Full Screen ( )] on the bottom of the video screen.

The current video will be enlarged to the full screen.

2. To exit the full screen mode, press [ Esc ] on the keyboard.

To select a split mode

You can select a split mode on the video screen.

1 4:3 aspect ratio : 1/4/9/16/25/36

1 16:9 aspect ratio : 1/6/12/20/30

28_ live viewer

Video Sequence

This is to transit the camera video screen automatically.

This is useful especially if the number of connected cameras is greater than the split screens, as many cameras as the split screens will be displayed in the first sequence and the remaining cameras in the next sequence, and so on.

1. Click [ Sequence ( )] on the bottom of the video screen.

Auto sequence will be performed to fit the current split mode.

2. To exit the auto sequence mode, click Sequence again.

M 

You can change the sequence interval in “ Setup > Viewer > Option > Sequence ”. (page 44)



In auto sequence mode, the following menus or functions will be disabled: disconnect, listen to sound, zoom in/out, screen sequence, favorite sequence, digital zoom, save favorites, delete favorites.



In case of automatic switching, the Fish eye camera will operates as overview.

Ex) If two devices are connected, device 1 has 16 cameras connected and device 2 has 8 cameras connected in a 9-split screen mode, the monitor screen will be displayed as follows:

#1 ~ #9 cameras of device 1 p #10 ~ #16 cameras of device 1 + #1 ~ #2 cameras of device 2 p #3 ~ #8 cameras of device 2

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH5

CH4

CH9

CH8

CH7

CH6

CH16

CH15

CH14

CH13

CH12

CH11

CH10

Single Mode

1

16

CH13

CH9

CH1

CH5

CH11

CH15

CH7

CH3

CH2

CH6

CH16

CH12

CH8

CH14

CH10

CH4

13-16

9-12

5-8

1-4

4-split Mode

CH10

CH1

CH13

CH4

CH16

CH7 CH8

CH11

CH2

CH14

CH5

CH12

CH3

CH15

CH6

CH9

10-16

1-9

9-split Mode

English

_29

live viewer

Scroll View

If the number of cameras that are currently connected is greater than the number of the selected tile pattern, use the scroll bar to move to the next or previous video.

Ex) If two 4CH devices sets are connected in a 2x2 tile, you will have a total of 8 videos. You can scroll up or down the list and monitor 4 videos at once.

< 1 CH ~ 4 CH > < 5 CH ~ 8 CH >

M 

Move the scroll bar up or down to move to the next or previous video in the list.

To apply the video de-interlacing

You can set to apply de-interlacing to each channel or to your preference.

1.

Select a desired camera video.

2. Right-click the channel to display the context menu where you select [ Deinterlace ].

Deinterlacing will be applied to the selected channel or released if the channel has deinterlacing already applied.

30_ live viewer

Apply Defog to Video

Defog function can be set in the supporting devices.

1.

Select a video from camera.

2.

Click [ Defog ] menu at the bottom of video window.

One from < Off / Auto / Manual > can be selected.

Defog level can be selected when the mode is set as

< Auto > or < Manual >.

Changing the Profile

If the registered device is a network camera, the profile can be changed.

1. Select a video from camera.

2.

Right-click the mouse to display Context menu. Select

[ Change Profile ] from the menu.

3. You can view the profile video selected from profile list displayed on the right.

Alarm Reset

Event state of device is initialized and alarm is cleared.

Right-click the mouse in video window to display Context menu. Select [ Alarm Reset ] from the menu.

English

_31

live viewer

Selecting a Fish Eye View Mode

If your registered device is a Fish eye camera, you can change the fish eye view mode.

Changing the Fish Eye Installation Type

You can change the Fish eye installation type. The following view modes correspond to the installation locations.

Ceiling/Ground : OverView, Single View, Quad View,

1 OverView + 3 Rectangles, 2 Panoramas

Wall : OverView, Single View, 1 Panorama, 1Panorama +

2 Rectangles

M 

If you set the Fish eye installation type in your device, you cannot change the Fish eye installation type.

32_ live viewer

search viewer

From the top right corner of the SmartViewer main screen, click the [ Search ] tab.

NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH ITEM IN SEARCH VIEWER

b c m

Item

Device List b

Date Search c

POS Search

Heatmap search

Advanced Search

Digital Zoom

PTZ Control

Time Search/Play Bar

Backup

Description

Displays a list of devices available.

Displays the recording history.

Search for the POS use history using the time information and keyword.

Search for the Heatmap record by dates.



You can only use it with equipment that supports the Heatmap function.

Displays the search options available.

Displays a digital-zoomed image.

Controls the PTZ.



You can use it in your Fish eye camera only.

You can specify the search time and play the data found.

You can backup a desired time range of the data.

English

_33

search viewer

Item

Video Screen Control Bar

Timeline

Zoom In/Out m

Video Screen

Description

Use the buttons to control the video screen.

For more information, see “ Name and function of each item in Live Viewer ”. (page 12)

Displays the data range to save using the color bars.

Zooms in or out the time range of the data found.

Displays the data of video found.

Indications of the Video Input Status

You can check the input status of the camera video signal as follows:

1.

2.

3.

: No data

: Disconnected

: Excessive concurrent users

DEVICE LIST

From the device list, you can select a device to search for.

1. Check the list of registered devices.

2. Select a group or device to search for and connect to it.

M 

If you access the search mode, the first listed device will be selected automatically.

DATE SEARCH

The calendar will display the date history of recording data.

1. Click the date search menu.

The calendar should appear.

2. Select a desired year and month.

The dates of recording data will be highlighted.

3. Select a date to search for.

The recording details on the selected date will be displayed in the result pane.

34_ search viewer

POS SEARCH

You can search for the POS use history using the time information and keyword.

To perform the search

1. Specify the time information including year, month, day and time.

2.

Enter a keyword for your search.

1 Find whole words only: If this option is not selected, the space between characters will be considered as AND.

Ex) If you enter “2500WON cash”, the search will find only data items including both “2500WON” and “cash”.

1 Match case: If selected, the search will be performed case sensitively.

3. Click < Search >.

To view the search results

Select an item in the bottom list to check the thumbnail and play the video if available.

1. In the search pane, select a video item that you want to play.

If there occurs a duplicate section due to a time change from the device, an index of such duplicates will be created accordingly.

2.

If there exists a duplicate section, select the number of the duplicate section.

If there exists multiple duplicate sections, the first recording data item will be displayed “0” with a list of up to 16 items.

3. Double-click an item to search for.

If any one result of your POS search involves multiple connected cameras, only the thumbnail of the first-listed camera will be displayed.

4. If multiple cameras are connected, check the checkbox of the camera of your choice and click Play.

If one result of your POS search involves multiple connected cameras, you can play the videos from all the connected cameras simultaneously.

Ex) If 3 cameras are connected, you can play 3 videos on the 2x2 split screen.

M 

In POS search mode, data backup will be disabled.

English

_35

search viewer

HEATMAP SEARCH

In the video, you can check the frequency of appearance of objects (e.g.- human, car) in each area.

Search

1.

Select the camera/search target/year/month/date and time for your search.

2. Click or drag the video to select the area for your search.

3. Click on the < Start searching > button.

View search results

1.

The Heatmap search results are displayed in the list at the bottom.

2. If you select a search item in the list, then the frequency of appearance of an object set in the video will be displayed in different colors depending on the level.

M 

The following colors are used for levels.

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8

3. Select a search item and click on the < Play > button to the left of the list to move to the play screen.

4.

You can start playing the video at the start time selected in the list.

M 

Repeat section

If the device time is changed and there are some duplicate recordings, you can select each timeline.

The first recording data is set at “no. 0” and a max of sixteen data sets can be displayed at any one time.



Heatmap search does not support backup function.

36_ search viewer

ADVANCED SEARCH

You can refine your search according to the record type.

1.

Click the advanced search menu.

The Advanced Search window appears.

2. Select a desired item to search for.

1 All : You can search for all camera videos from the selected device.

1 Manual, Alarm, Motion, Video Loss, Schedule, Intelligent

Video Analysis, Audio Detection : The search will be performed on the current screen, whose mode will switch to one-channel (full) screen.

DIGITAL ZOOM

Digital Zoom is to enlarge the screen image using the magnifier function.

1.

Click the digital zoom selection bar.

2.

Double-click a desired camera video.

The selected camera video will be displayed on the digital zoom screen.

M 

For using the digital zoom function, see “ Digital Zoom ”

(page 22)

English

_37

search viewer

PTZ

If you use a Fish eye camera, you can control the PTZ.

SEARCHING FOR PLAYABLE DATA

To specify the play time

The blue vertical line in the result pane indicates the play time of the video.

1.

Specify the time to search for.

2. Click the [ ] button to the right.

The play time will switch to the specified time.

M 

You can drag the blue vertical line to change the play time.



The time information on the bottom left corner indicates the current play time.

38_ search viewer

To select a camera to play

If you double-click a camera in the result pane, the video of the selected camera will be added.

The default of the timeline is 4 channels, where you can expand the area or use the scroll bar to add up to 16 channels for your search.

1. Double-click a camera in the result pane, or check the checkbox of a desired camera to select it.

2.

From the first empty screen on, the video of the selected camera will be displayed.

M 

If you drag and drop a camera in the result pane, the camera video will be added to the selected video window.

To expand the play time

< 24-hour format >

< 1-hour format >

1.

Click [ Expand ( )] in the right corner of the result pane.

2.

Based on the play timeline, the play time will be expanded: 24 hrs p 12 hrs p 6 hrs p 2 hrs p 1 hr.

When the play time is expanded to 1 hour, the Expand button will be inactive while the Collapse button will be active.

To collapse the play time

1.

Click [ Collapse ( )] in the right corner of the result pane.

2.

Based on the play timeline, the play time will be expanded:

1 hr p 2 hrs p 6 hrs p 12 hrs p 24 hrs.

When the play time is collapsed to 24 hours, the Collapse button will be inactive while the Expand button will be active.

1 The recoding ranges will be highlighted in different colors, depending on the recording reason.

- Black : Manual recording

- Orange : Recording due to an event

- Blue : Recording due to a motion

- Pink : Video Loss

- Yellowish Green : Scheduled recording

- Purple : Intelligent Video Analysis

- Sky blue : Audio Detection

English

_39

search viewer

To move the play timeline

When a recording data item is found, the current time point will be marked as the play timeline.

1. Select a data item to search for.

The current time point will be marked as the play timeline.

2.

Click the play timeline and drag and drop it to a desired start time.

When the play time table is expanded, use the [ Move ( , )] buttons to move the play time earlier or later.

M 

With the play time table expanded, if you use the arrow button to move to an earlier time and move back to a later time at the end of the earlier time, the timeline will be positioned at the very start point.

PLAYBACK CONTROL

You can stop playing a searched video temporarily or control the play speed.

Play

1. Select an item to play and click [ Play ( )].

The current play speed will be shown in the play time status bar.

2.

You can use the play bar to play the video fast or slowly.

40_ search viewer

Name and function of each item in play bar

b c

1.

Play & Pause

2. Fast forward/backward (inactive in pause mode)

Each time the button is clicked, videos are played at speeds of x2, x4, x8, x16, x32 and x64 in forward or reverse order.

3.

Frame advance/reverse-frame advance

The video will be played by the frame. The buttons will be inactive during the playback.

4. Skip/Skip backward

Skips playing between events.

M 

Some equipments are not supported.

BACKUP

You can backup video data to the PC where the program is currently running.

To back up the searched video

You can back up multiple videos from the scanned channels at once.

1. Click [ Backup ( )].

You will see a dialog for your backup.

2.

In the Backup dialog, select a channel(s) to back up.

Then, the time setting option will be activated.

3. Specify the start and end times as necessary.

4.

Click [ Start ] to start backup.

5. To stop backing up, click [ Stop ].

6. To exit the backup, click [ Close ].

The backed up data till then will be saved before the window is closed.

M 

For the backup format, only “ sec ” is available. The backup viewer to play the backup data is integrated by default.

You can view the backup data by launching the viewer.

English

_41

search viewer

To resume the backup

If backup is stopped, you can resume the backup later, starting from the stopped point.

1. To exit the backup screen, simply click [ Continuous Later ].

The current backup will be stopped with the backup screen closed.

2. Click [ Backup ( )].

The backup screen for your last operation will appear again.

3.

Click [ Start ].

Your last backup operation will be resumed.

To change the file path

You can backup video data to the PC where the program is currently running.

1.

Click [ Set Path ( )].

The “ Browse For Folder ” window should appear.

2. Specify a desired backup path.

42_ search viewer

setup

Click [ Setup ( )] in the top right corner of the program screen.

Click viewer and device to display setup screen configured with tabs according to each function.

Various viewer-related settings can be made using viewer items.

A device to connect to SmartViewer can be set or updated using device items.

When you complete your settings, click [ OK ] or [ Apply ] to apply your settings.

M 

When you access the setting page, all devices will be disconnected.

OPTION TAB

You can configure the Live Viewer or Search Viewer settings.

OSD Display

You can display/hide the on-screen information.

Date/Time

If checked, the time and date information will be displayed in the upper area of the video screen.

English

_43

setup

Information Icon

If checked, the information of PTZ, speaker settings and recording status will be displayed in the lower area of the video screen.

Camera Name

If checked, the camera name will be displayed in the upper area of the video screen.

Display Event

If checked, the event will be displayed in the lower area of the video screen when it occurs.

Show Rules of Intelligent video analysis

Click the check box to display video analysis rules set in camera video screen.

Date/Time

Specify the date/time format that will be displayed on the video screen.

Date Format

Select one from YYYY-MM-DD, MM-DD-YYYY and DD-MM-YYYY.

Time Format

Choose between hh:mm:ss and hh:mm.

Capture

Specify the picture format and saving location of the captured screen.

Record

Specify the file path and time of recording videos.

You can specify the recording time from 1 minute to 2 hours (120 min).

Sequence

Selecting this will display the camera videos one by one according to the split mode. This can be used also for sequencing favorites if you access the group.

Select a sequence interval from 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60 seconds.

44_ setup

Receive Events

Auto pop-up of the Receive Events window

You can select to create a popup window if there is an incoming event.

If checked, the Receive Events window will pop up when an event occur as shown in the figure to the right.

Motion Excluded

You can select to receive a motion event, one of the event types.

Intelligent Video Analysis Excluded.

You can enable or disable notification on intelligent video analysis events.

Audio Detection Excluded.

You can enable or disable notification on audio detection events.

Event Sound

You can select an event sound to output if there is an incoming event.

To change the sound, click [ Set Path ( )].

The Open dialog appears when you can specify the path.

Play Sound

You can select to repeat the sound if an event is received.

If set to Continuous, the event sound will not be stopped until you confirm the event.

Event Discard Time

This is a time of disregarding an event if the same event occurs. If the same type of event occurs from the same camera within the specified time, the later event will be discarded.

English

_45

setup

Others Options

Language

You can select a preferred OSD language for the viewer.

Languages supported: Korean, English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Russian, Spanish, Japanese, Turkish,

Czech, Polish, Serbian, Rumanian, Portuguese, Dutch, Croatian, Hungarian, Greek, Taiwanese, Swedish,

Danish, Norwegian and Finnish.

M 

Your change will be applied right away, but the exiting log information will remain in the previous language.

View a list of turned-off camera

If checked, you will see a list of turned-off cameras.

Keep aspect ratio

If checked, the video will be displayed in its original size.

<Release the aspect ratio>

Others

<Keep the aspect ratio>

Restore the default

This will restore the default settings of the viewer.

OK

The Setup window will be closed with your settings applied to the viewer.

Cancel

The Setup window will be closed without applying your settings to the viewer.

Apply

Your changes are applied to the viewer.

46_ setup

HIDE CAMERA TAB

Setup to display or not to display camera or alarm out objects below the device in a tree.

M 

Objects cannot be found from the tree using Find Object function if the camera is inactivated.



Event information of an inactivated camera is not displayed.

<:>

Setup

-

Oevoce

Option

I

L . ol-7~02.

112 1'18.0.101 4520<>ml

L &

SNB-7002_192.168.0.101:4520~1 s.

<t 371 ' 12 168.~.87'4520

L W

S <P-3371_192.168.0.87:4520.C.rrll1

L a IP 3371. 192 168.0.87:452Q-Aianrll1

L a S IP-l37U92.168.0.87:4520-Aianrll2

Update

Loo selected comeras

,...-s

· •·"

7 191168.0.101:4520-c.rrll1 a oJ2_d2 168.0.1014520-Aianrll1

L a <P 3371_192.168.0.87:452Q-Aw<

S .

67X. 192.168.0.208:4520

L W

U>-167X_192 168.0.208:4520-QrTO,

L . S Ul-167X_192 168.0.208:4520-c.mo2

L . SIID-167X '12 168.0.208'4520.QIT03

L W

SIID-167X_192.168.0.208:452()-c.rr04

L W to-,61X ,

~2

,68,0.208.4520-CamOS

L W

Ul-167X_192.168.0.208:452Q-Qr\"06

L . Ul-167X,19< 168.0.208·452o-c.mo7

L . SRD-167)(._192.168.0.208:452o-c.mos

L W

U>-167X_192.168.0.208:4520.Qn'09

L . S>Ul-167X. 112 168.0.208:452o-c.m10

L W

S>UhS7x._,J2.168.0.208:4520.Qm1,

L W

SIID-167X 192.168.0.208'452o-c.m12

'•

L

L

.

Ul-161X _ 192 168.0.208:4520.Qm13

SOU>-167X_192.168.0.208:4520.Qm14

tn..,'i:Z'i , :UJ"ia.Jl..2 .. r

~

V A

I

X

I

English

_47

setup

USER TAB

You can add or delete a user, or change the ID or password.

M 

If Auto Login (admin) is set, you can launch SmartViewer directly without providing the ID and password.

User List

To add a user

1.

Click [ Add User ].

2. Enter your login ID.

You can enter up to 31 characters for the ID including alphabets, numeric and ‘—’.

3.

Enter the password.

Password can be made up of 8 – 31 digits excluding spaces with a combination of English characters and numbers.

4.

Provide additional information such as the telephone number or the address, according to the user.

5. To refine the user permissions, check the [ Permission

Setup ] checkbox and select desired options.

6. Click [ OK ].

The user will be added with the provided ID.

M 

The “ ADMIN ” ID is the default ID that is created when the program is installed.

This ID cannot be removed. However, you can change the password.

48_ setup

To change the user information

1. Select a user whose information you want to change.

2. Click [ Modify ].

You can change the user information.

To delete a user

1.

Select a user to delete.

2. Click [ Delete ].

The selected user information will be deleted.

M 

You cannot delete an account in use now.

VIEWER-UPDATE TAB

Support SmartViewer update through a remote update server and export or import setup.

English

_49

setup

Auto Update

If Auto Update is checked, check if a new software file is available in the server.

To specify the interval of checking the update server

You can specify the interval of checking the update server.

1. Specify the interval and the date.

Select one from once/everyday/every week/every month, and you can specify the date/time according to your selection.

2. If a new software file is found in checking the update server, the fact will be notified to the user who can select to perform the update.

3.

Click [ Update ].

Regardless of the Auto Update setting, the program will check if there is a new software file available in the update server.

Manage SmartViewer Configuration

You can export the SmartViewer configuration file.

Export SmartViewer configuration

You can save the SmartViewer configuration as a file.

1. Check the checkbox and select configuration items.

2. Specify the path of saving the items.

3.

Click [ Export Configuration ].

The configuration items will be saved as a file and the result will be displayed in a message popup.

Import SmartViewer configuration

You can import and read the SmartViewer configuration items as a file.

1.

Select a configuration item to import.

2. Select the file that is saved.

3. Click [ Import Configuration ].

The configuration items will be read from the file.

50_ setup

LOG INFORMATION TAB

You can search for system-related logs by the occurrence time and by the item.

1. Specify the start and end times for the log search.

2. Click the checkbox of a desired log item to select it.

3.

Click [ Start searching ].

The log information will be displayed in the log list.

4. To delete the list of logs that you have searched for, click [ Remove All ].

M 

If you exit the program, the log list will be deleted. You can check the deleted log list in the following path.

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Samsung\SmartViewer3.0\Log

Windows Vista/7: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Samsung\SmartViewer3.0\Log

English

_51

setup

DEVICE REGISTRATION TAB

You can add a device, check a list of registered devices, or change the device settings.

M 

If < Apply Camera Title > is checked, logging in and accessing the device or a group that contains the device, the device name registered to the corresponding DVR is shown in the device/camera name list.

Device List

Displays a list of devices that are registered by the user.

To add a device automatically

You can scan for a device in the local network before registering it.

1. Click [ Add Automatically ].

A list of all devices connected in the local network will be shown in the “ Add Automatically ” window.

Any registered device will be displayed grey.

2. Select a device to register from the list.

3.

Provide the user ID and password, and press the [ Register ] button.

The user ID and password are the information saved in the device to register.

M 

This program does not check at registration if the user information is correct.



If you want to check if the user information is correct, click [ Connection Test ].



If you encounter an error during the connection test, an error message will appear.

52_ setup

To add a device manually

You can provide information for the device manually that you want to connect to.

1.

Click [ Add Manually ].

The “ Add Manually ” should appear.

2. Select the model name of the device that you want to connect to.

In case of a product of which the model is not in the list, registration is enabled by selecting integrated Samsung model name (Samsung DVR, Samsung Network Camera_

Encoder, Samsung NVR).

M 

For more information, refer to the user manual of the applicable device.

3. Select an address type.

The address format available is one of: IP Address, URL, websamsung.net, ddns.s1.co.kr, samsungipolis.com

4. Specify setting values necessary for connecting the device.

The information differs depending on the address type.

5.

Provide the user ID and password.

The user ID and password are the information that is set in the device to register.

6. Click [ Connection Test ].

Use the user-provided information to perform the connection test.

If you encounter an error during the connection test, an error message will appear.

7. Click [ Register ].

Connection Error Type

1 Parameter Error: The parameter is wrong. Check the connection information again.

1 Device Connection Error: The device is not connected.

Check if the device is connected to the network properly.

1 Network Error: Not connected to the network.

Check if the device is connected to the network properly.

1 Redundant Address Error: The same address already exists. (If the IP and the port number are the same)

1 Login ID Error: The login ID is not valid. Verify the login ID that you provided.

1 Login Password Error: The login password is not valid.

Check the login password again.

English

_53

setup

To change the device information

You can change the device information.

1. Select a device of which the information you want to change and click [ Modify ].

You can change all information except for the model name.

If you register a device in < Samsung DVR >, you must complete the device registration and connect to the device before it can be listed in the current window.

M 

When renaming a device/group while connected, a message of “ Do you want to disconnect the network and proceed?

” appears, and select “ Yes ” to disconnect and continue renaming. Select “ No ” to remain connected and discard renaming.

To delete a device

1. Select a device to delete.

2.

Click [ Delete ].

3.

Click [ Yes ].

The selected device will be deleted.

To create a device group

You can create/manage a group of registered devices so that you can access them simultaneously.

1. Click [ Add Group ].

2. Enter the name of the group to create.

The group will be created with the provided name.

To add a device to the device group

You can create/manage a group of registered devices so that you can access them simultaneously.

1. Select a device to add.

2.

Select a group to add device to.

3.

Click [ Add to the selected group ].

Device is added to the group. You can add up to 36 devices.

To delete a device group

1. Select a group to delete.

2.

Click [ Delete ].

3. Click [ Yes ].

The selected group will be deleted.

54_ setup

Device Setup

1. Select a device.

2. Click [ Device Setup page ].

The Device Setup window appears where you can configure the device settings in details.

M 

The Setup window may differ depending on the connected device; for more information, see the user manual of the appropriate device.



Logging on as a general user account of OS and running the [ Device Setup page ] may not operate properly.

To run [ Device Setup page ] properly, log on as the administrator account of your OS.

DEVICE-UPDATE TAB

Update device firmware and export or import setup.

English

_55

setup

To update the device

To update the software of the device, you should save the new software file to your PC in advance.

1. Select a device to update.

2. Select the new software for the update.

3.

Specify the path of the update file.

4.

Click [ Firmware Update ].

The program will start being updated with the update status displayed.

M 

You can update multiple devices simultaneously, which will be updated in the order of registration.



Update function is not available in some devices.

Manage Device Configuration

Export Device Configuration

You can save the device configuration as a file.

1.

Select a device to save the configuration.

2. Specify the path of saving the file.

3. Click [ Export Configuration ].

The configuration will be saved as a file and the result will be displayed in a message popup.

Import Device Configuration

You can read the device configuration from the configuration file.

1.

Select a configuration item to import.

2.

Select the file that is saved.

3. Select the [ Include Network Settings ] checkbox.

If it is selected, the network information will be imported.

4.

Click [ Import Configuration ].

The configuration items will be read from the file.

M 

Export and import configuration function is not available in some devices.

56_ setup

OPEN SOURCE LICENSE NOTIFICATION ON THE PRODUCT

The software included in this product contains copyrighted software that is licensed under the Boost Software License 1.0 /

Stichting Mathematisch License/Code Project Open 1.02 License.

o Boost Software License : Boost C++ Libraries – boost o Stichting Mathematisch License : Audio File Library o Code Project Open 1.02 License : Code Project - A reusable, high performance, socket server class - Part 3, Code Project -

AlphaBlendTextBox - A transparent/translucent textbox for .NET, Code Project - An animated progressbar control with many extras, Code Project - An animated progressbar control with many extras, Code Project - BarTender - Group your contents,

Code Project - Inter-Process Communication with C#

Boost Software License - Version 1.0

August 17th, 2003

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:

The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.




PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE

DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR

OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,

ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE

OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Stichting Mathematisch License

Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 by Stichting Mathematisch

Centrum, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.

All Rights Reserved

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the names of Stichting

Mathematisch Centrum or CWI not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission.

STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM DISCLAIMS ALL

WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO

EVENT SHALL STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM BE LIABLE

FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR

ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,

DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR

IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

The Code Project Open License (CPOL) 1.02

o Code Project - A reusable, high performance, socket server class -

Part 3 (2002, Len Holgate) o Code Project - AlphaBlendTextBox - A transparent/translucent textbox for .NET (2003, Bob Bradley) o Code Project - An animated progressbar control with many extras

(2006, Robert Rohde) o Code Project – BarTender – Group your contents (2006, Robert

Rohde) o Code Project - Inter-Process Communication with C# (2007, tran manh tuan)

Preamble

This License governs Your use of the Work. This License is intended to allow developers to use the Source Code and Executable Files provided as part of the Work in any application in any form.

The main points subject to the terms of the License are: o Source Code and Executable Files can be used in commercial applications; o Source Code and Executable Files can be redistributed; and o Source Code can be modified to create derivative works.

o No claim of suitability, guarantee, or any warranty whatsoever is provided. The software is provided “as-is”.

o The Article accompanying the Work may not be distributed or republished without the Author’s consent

This License is entered between You, the individual or other entity reading or otherwise making use of the Work licensed pursuant to this

License and the individual or other entity which offers the Work under the terms of this License (“Author”).

License

THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS

OF THIS CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS

PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW.

ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER

THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED.

BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN,

YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS

LICENSE. THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED

HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH

TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT

AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU CANNOT

MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.

1. Definitions. a) “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the

Work may be used by a user.

b) “Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this License.

c) “Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other pre-existing works.

d) “Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any required data files included in the Work.

e) “Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine,

CD-ROM, DVD or other medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.

f) “Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to create the Executable Files.

g) “Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full discretion of the

Author. h) “Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and the Articles. i) “You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights under this License.

2. Fair Use/Fair Use Rights.

Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.

3. License Grant.

Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the

Work as stated below: a) You may use the standard version of the Source Code or

Executable Files in Your own applications. b) You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.

c) You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the

Articles) in any way to create a Derivative Work, provided that

You insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.

d) You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or Derivative Work in aggregate with other

(possibly commercial) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial) software distribution. e) The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be distributed or republished without the

Author’s consent. The author retains copyright to any such

Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.

Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source

Code or Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this

Work and will not be subject to the terms of this License.

4. Patent License.

Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, import, and otherwise transfer the Work.

5. Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to and limited by the following restrictions: a) You agree not to remove any of the original copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files. b) You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your own. c) The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.

d) You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you from including the Work or any part of the

Work inside a larger software distribution that itself is being sold.

The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.

e) You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for, this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source

Code agrees that the terms of this License apply to such

Executable Files and/or Source Code. You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source

Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this

License. f) You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to the Work after Your receipt of the Work.

6.

Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer.

THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, “WHERE IS” AND “AS

AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES

OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME ALL

RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT

INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS

ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF

TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY

PORTION THEREOF) IS CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF

VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU

DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS.

7. Indemnity.

You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the

Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to any use of the Work by You.

8. Limitation on Liability.

EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO

EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU

ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,

CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING

OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE WORK OR

OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

9. Termination. a) This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any breach by You of any term of this

License. Individuals or entities who have received Derivative

Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9,

10 and 11 will survive any termination of this License. b) If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against any contributor over infringements

You claim are made by the Work, your License from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.

c) Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright in the

Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.

10. Publisher.

The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The

Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time without notice

11. Miscellaneous a) This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of residence of the Author.

b) If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable. c) No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent. d) This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You.

SALES NETWORK

SAMSUNG TECHWIN CO., LTD.

Samsung Techwin R&D Center, 6, Pangyo-ro 319beon-gil, Bundang-gu, Songnam-si, Gyeonggi-do 463-400, Korea

TEL : +82-70-7147-8740~60 FAX : +82-31-8018-3745

SAMSUNG TECHWIN AMERICA Inc.

100 Challenger Rd. Suite 700 Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660

Toll Free : +1-877-213-1222 Direct : +1-201-325-6920

Fax : +1-201-373-0124 www.samsungcctvusa.com

www.samsungtechwin.com

www.samsungsecurity.com

www.samsungipolis.com

SAMSUNG TECHWIN EUROPE LTD.

Samsung House, 1000 Hillswood Drive, Hillswood Business

Park Chertsey, Surrey, UNITED KINGDOM KT16 OPS

TEL : +44-1932-45-5300 FAX : +44-1932-45-5325

SmartViewer 4.3.2

Manual&

I

nstall Prog

r

am

-WindowsXP

Professional SP2

- Windows Vista

Business/Ultimate

- Windows 7 Professional/

Ultimate/Enterprise

- Windows 8 32/64bit

llllllllllllllllllllllllllllll

$lt't'¥1iiJi$>

SAMSUNG TECHWIN

Copyright 2014 c 1 SAMSUNG rECHWlN All rights R&$~1'\ied. www.sarnsungtechwln.com

Intelligent surveillance &

Security System

SDS-P30421V3042/S3042/P3022

SDS-P40421V4042/S4042/P4082

SDS-P5082/S5082/P5102/P5122

SAMSUNG TECHWIN

PROFESS

I

ONAL

INSTALLATION

Why not get it

Prt)fesstonolly I 'e and save yourself the hassle?

DVR Security system

87 ' 1-1003

How To AcTIVATEvouR

Instal/Cord

AND SCHEDULE YOUR INSTALLATION

0

Visit www.lnstallerNet.com

8

Enter the lnstaiiCard number below.

mana by,

..........

(800) 806 5513

Mer actiVating th i s lnstaHca!d

, you may use ilto ammge instaDatlon of your e l ectron i cs product 1n your home by an lnstalle!Net Installer cable, parts or labor whidl may be purchased

. Some homes may requ separately at the i re ad<frtional time of i nstallation

Electrical codes prevent standard de'/IC&i)OWer cables from being fished through waDs .

There is a three year installation wananty from the date of insta l lation . This lnstaDcard

IS va l id up to one year from the dale of purchase where perm i tted by law Vis~ www .

l nstaUcard .

com for more informabon . NOT VALID UNTIL PURCHASED .

Do not return this product to the store.

If you need any help with setup, need technical support or have any questions about this product, please call the toll free number below. A Samsung agent that has been fully trained on this product will be happy to assist you. All calls are handled in the United States and both English and Spanish speaking agents are available. Hours of operation are 9:00am-9:00pm Eastern Time Monday through Friday.

Toll-Free

(877) 349-3149

LIMITED WARRANTY TO ORIGINAL PURCHASER

Samsung Techwin America(ST A), warrants that this product is free from defective material and workmanship.

Samsung Techwin America(ST A) further warrants that if this product fails to operate properly within the specified warranty period and the failure is due to improper workmanship or defective materials,

Samsung Techwin America(STA) will repair or replace the product at its option.

All warranty repairs must be performed by a Samsung Techwin America(ST A) Authorized Service

Center. (The name and address of the location nearest you can be obtained by calling toll free:

1-877 -349-3149)

LABOR LABOR

One year (Carry- in) One year

On carry-in models, transportation to and from the service center is the customer's responsibility.

The original dated sales receipt must be retained by the customer and is the only acceptable proof of purchase. It must be presented to the authorized service center at the time service is requested.

This warranty does not cover damage due to accident, fire, flood and/ or other acts of God; misuse, incorrect line voltage, improper installation, improper or unauthorized repairs, commercial use or damage that occurs in shipping. Exterior and interior finish, lamps, glass are not covered under this warranty. Customer adjustments which are explained in the instruction manual are not covered under the terms of this warranty. This warranty will automatically be voided for any unit found with a missing or altered serial number.

SAMSUNG TECHWIN AMERICA www.samsungsv.com

Authorized Service Center : 1-877-349-3149

AB68-01 076A